Mercedes - CLS 350 CDI 4MATIC - Owners Manual - 2016 - 2016

CLS É2185849301\ËÍ 2185849301 Order no. P218 0018 13 Part no. 218 584 93 01 Edition A-2016 CLS Operator's Manual Operator's Manual Symbols Registered trademarks: RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Inc. RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories. RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered trademarks of Daimler AG. RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls. RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Harman International Industries. RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc. RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiquity Digital Corporation. RGracenote® is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are registered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC. In this Operator's Manual you will find the following symbols: X This symbol indicates an instruction that must be followed. Several of these symbols in succesX sion indicate an instruction with several steps. This symbol tells you where you can (Y page) find more information about a topic. This symbol indicates a warning or an YY instruction that is continued on the next page. This text indicates a message in the Dis play multifunction/COMAND/Audio display. ~ This symbol tells you that you can find further information in the Digital Operator's Manual. Publication details Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites: http://www.mbusa.com (USA only) http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only) Editorial office ©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG. Vehicle manufacturer Daimler AG Mercedesstraße 137 70327 Stuttgart Germany G WARNING Warning notes make you aware of dangers which could pose a threat to your health or life, or to the health and life of others. H Environmental note Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or disposal. ! Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle. i Practical tips or further information that could be helpful to you. As at 23.09.2014 Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz We urge you to read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty. This Operator's Manual provides information on the most important functions of your vehicle. Additional information on convenience functions can be found in COMAND in your Digital Operator's Manual. The equipment or product designation of your vehicle may vary depending on: Rmodel Rorder Rcountry specification Ravailability Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: Apple® iOS Android™ Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides App may not yet be available in your country. The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company Rdesign Requipment Rtechnical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The following are integral components of the vehicle: RDigital Operator's Manual Manual RMaintenance Booklet REquipment-dependent supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner. You can also use the Mercedes-Benz Guides App: ROperator's 2185849301 É2185849301\ËÍ Contents Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 33 Digital Operator's Manual .................. 23 Safety ................................................... 43 Introduction ......................................... 25 Opening and closing ........................... 85 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 103 Lights and windshield wipers .......... 109 Climate control ................................. 117 Driving and parking .......................... 125 On-board computer and displays .... 171 Audio 20/COMAND .......................... 197 Stowage and features ...................... 221 Maintenance and care ...................... 237 Breakdown assistance ..................... 245 Wheels and tires ............................... 263 Technical data ................................... 303 3 4 Index 1, 2, 3 ... 4ETS (Electronic Traction System) see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) 4MATIC (permanent all-wheel drive) Function/notes ............................. 153 12 V socket see Sockets 360° camera Function/notes ............................. 158 A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Display message ............................ 176 Function/notes ................................ 70 Important safety notes .................... 70 Warning lamp ................................. 189 Access data of the mobile phone network provider Making entries ............................... 218 Selecting ........................................ 218 Accident Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 63 Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification ................. 123 Active Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 174 Display message ............................ 175 Function/information .................... 166 Active Driving Assistance package .. 166 Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 174 Display message ............................ 175 Function/information .................... 168 Active Parking Assist Display message ............................ 175 Function/notes ............................. 155 Important safety notes .................. 155 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 79 Adaptive Brake Assist Function/notes ................................ 75 Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 152 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Display message ............................ 175 Function/notes ............................. 112 Switching on/off ........................... 112 Address book see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 198 Air bags Deployment ..................................... 59 Display message ............................ 181 Front air bag (driver, front passenger) ....................................... 51 Important safety notes .................... 50 Introduction ..................................... 50 Knee bag .......................................... 52 Occupant Classification System (OCS) ............................................... 53 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ........................................... 45 Pelvis air bag ................................... 52 Side impact air bag .......................... 52 Window curtain air bag .................... 53 AIR FLOW ........................................... 123 Air-conditioning system see Climate control AIRMATIC Function/notes ............................. 151 Alarm ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 82 Switching off (ATA) .......................... 82 Switching the function on/off (ATA) ................................................ 82 Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Ambient lighting Setting the brightness (on-board computer) ...................................... 174 Setting the color (on-board computer) ............................................. 174 AMG adaptive sport suspension system ................................................ 153 AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 174 Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-Theft Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Ashtray ............................................... 227 Index Assistance display (on-board computer) .................................................. 174 Assistance menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 174 ASSYST PLUS Displaying a service message ........ 242 Driving abroad ............................... 242 Hiding a service message .............. 242 Resetting the service interval display ................................................ 242 Service message ............................ 242 Special service requirements ......... 242 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Activating/deactivating ................... 82 Function ........................................... 82 Switching off the alarm .................... 82 ATTENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating ................. 174 Display message ............................ 175 Function/notes ............................. 160 Audio 20 Components .................................. 200 Controller ...................................... 206 Display ........................................... 201 Functions ....................................... 200 Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center see Qualified specialist workshop Authorized workshop see Qualified specialist workshop AUTO lights Display message ............................ 175 Automatic car wash (care) ............... 242 Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function) .................................... 131 Automatic engine switch-off (ECO start/stop function) .......................... 131 Automatic headlamp mode .............. 111 Automatic transmission Accelerator pedal position ............. 133 Automatic drive program ............... 133 Changing gear ............................... 133 DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 132 Display message ............................ 175 Drive program display .................... 132 Driving tips .................................... 133 Emergency running mode .............. 133 Engaging drive position .................. 132 Engaging neutral ............................ Engaging park position (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. Engaging park position automatically ............................................... Engaging reverse gear ................... Engaging the park position ............ Kickdown ....................................... Manual drive program .................... Manual drive program (MercedesAMG vehicles) ................................ Manual drive program (vehicles with Sports package AMG) ............ Overview ........................................ Problem (malfunction) ................... Program selector button ................ Pulling away ................................... Selector lever ................................ Starting the engine ........................ Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... Transmission position display ........ Transmission position display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... Transmission positions .................. Automatic transmission emergency mode ....................................... 133 132 132 132 132 133 133 133 133 131 133 133 130 132 130 133 132 132 133 133 B Back button ....................................... 206 BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 71 BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist Function/notes ................................ 71 Important safety notes .................... 72 Battery (SmartKey) Checking .......................................... 88 Replacing ......................................... 89 Battery (vehicle) Charging ........................................ 253 Important safety notes .................. 251 Jump starting ................................. 255 Belt see Seat belts Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating ................. 174 Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 174 5 6 Index Notes/function .............................. 163 see Active Blind Spot Assist Bluetooth® Connecting another mobile phone ............................................ 215 Entering the passcode ................... 214 Searching for a mobile phone ........ 213 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 198 Telephony ...................................... 212 Box (trunk) ......................................... 225 Brake Assist see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake fluid Display message ............................ 178 Notes ............................................. 309 Brake force distribution see EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Brake lamps Display message ............................ 175 Brakes ABS .................................................. 70 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 75 BAS .................................................. 71 BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist ............................................... 71 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 309 Display message ............................ 176 High-performance brake system .... 140 HOLD function ............................... 150 Important safety notes .................. 140 Maintenance .................................. 140 Parking brake ................................ 138 Riding tips ...................................... 140 Warning lamp ................................. 188 Breakdown Where will I find...? ........................ 246 see Flat tire see Towing away Brightness control (instrument cluster lighting) ................................... 35 Buttons and controller ...................... 206 C California Important notice for retail customers and lessees .......................... 27 Calling up a malfunction see Display messages Car see Vehicle Car key see SmartKey Care Car wash ........................................ 242 Carpets .......................................... 243 Display ........................................... 243 Exterior lights ................................ 243 Gear or selector lever .................... 243 Interior ........................................... 243 Matte finish ................................... 243 Notes ............................................. 242 Paint .............................................. 243 Plastic trim .................................... 243 Power washer ................................ 243 Rear view camera .......................... 243 Roof lining ...................................... 243 Seat belt ........................................ 243 Seat cover ..................................... 243 Sensors ......................................... 243 Tail pipes ....................................... 243 Trim pieces .................................... 243 Washing by hand ........................... 243 Wheels ........................................... 243 Windows ........................................ 243 Wiper blades .................................. 243 Wooden trim .................................. 243 Cargo tie down rings ......................... 224 CD see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 198 CD player (on-board computer) ........ 174 Center console Lower section .................................. 39 Lower section (AMG vehicles) .......... 40 Upper section .................................. 38 Central locking Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 174 Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 86 Index Child Restraint system .............................. 65 Child seat Forward-facing restraint system ...... 68 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors ............................................ 66 On the front-passenger seat ............ 68 Rearward-facing restraint system .... 68 Top Tether ....................................... 67 Child-proof locks Important safety notes .................... 68 Rear doors ....................................... 69 Children Special seat belt retractor ............... 64 Cigarette lighter ................................ 227 Cleaning Mirror turn signal ........................... 243 Clear button ....................................... 206 Climate control Automatic climate control (3zone) .............................................. 121 Controlling automatically ............... 123 Cooling with air dehumidification .. 123 Defrosting the windows ................. 123 Defrosting the windshield .............. 123 Dual-zone automatic climate control ................................................. 119 General notes ................................ 118 Indicator lamp ................................ 123 Maximum cooling .......................... 123 Overview of systems ...................... 118 Problem with the rear window defroster ........................................ 123 Problems with cooling with air dehumidification ............................ 123 Rear control panel ......................... 121 Refrigerant ..................................... 311 Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 312 Setting the air distribution ............. 123 Setting the air vents ...................... 123 Setting the airflow ......................... 123 Setting the climate mode (AIR FLOW) ............................................ 123 Setting the temperature ................ 123 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ............................................ 123 Switching on/off ........................... 123 Switching residual heat on/off ...... 123 Switching the rear window defroster on/off ............................ 123 Switching the ZONE function on/ off .................................................. 123 Cockpit Overview .......................................... 34 see Instrument cluster Collapsible spare wheel Inflating ......................................... 299 see Emergency spare wheel COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS Display message ............................ 175 Operation/notes .............................. 73 COMAND Components .................................. 200 Control panel ................................. 203 Controller ...................................... 206 Display ........................................... 201 Functions ....................................... 200 Combination switch .......................... 111 Connecting a USB device see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 198 Consumption statistics (on-board computer) .......................................... 174 Control panel ..................................... 205 Controller ........................................... 206 Convenience box ............................... 225 Coolant (engine) Checking the level ......................... 241 Display message ............................ 182 Filling capacity ............................... 311 Important safety notes .................. 310 Temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 174 Temperature gauge ........................ 172 Warning lamp ................................. 193 Cooling see Climate control Copyright ............................................. 32 Cornering light function Display message ............................ 175 Function/notes ............................. 111 Crash-responsive emergency lighting ....................................................... 113 7 8 Index Cruise control Activation conditions ..................... 142 Cruise control lever ....................... 142 Deactivating ................................... 142 Display message ............................ 175 Driving system ............................... 141 Function/notes ............................. 141 Important safety notes .................. 141 Selecting ........................................ 142 Setting a speed .............................. 142 Storing and maintaining current speed ............................................. 142 Cup holder Center console .............................. 227 Important safety notes .................. 227 Rear compartment ......................... 227 Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ..................................................... 30 Customer Relations Department ....... 30 D Dashboard see Instrument cluster Data see Technical data Daytime running lamps Display message ............................ 175 Switching on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 174 Switching on/off (switch) .............. 111 Declarations of conformity ................. 29 Delayed switch-off Exterior lighting (on-board computer) ............................................. 174 Interior lighting .............................. 174 Diagnostics connection ...................... 29 Digital Operator's Manual Help ................................................. 23 Introduction ..................................... 23 Digital speedometer ......................... 174 DIRECT SELECT lever Automatic transmission ................. 132 Display (cleaning instructions) ........ 243 Display messages ASSYST PLUS ................................ 242 Calling up (on-board computer) ............................................. 175 Driving systems ............................. 175 Engine ............................................ 182 General notes ................................ 175 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 175 KEYLESS-GO .................................. 175 Lights ............................................. 175 Safety systems .............................. 176 SmartKey ....................................... 175 Tires ............................................... 183 Vehicle ........................................... 185 Distance recorder ............................. 174 Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 194 Distance warning function Function/notes ................................ 74 DISTRONIC PLUS Activating ....................................... 144 Activation conditions ..................... 144 Deactivating ................................... 146 Display message ............................ 175 Displays in the multifunction display ................................................ 146 Function/notes ............................. 142 Important safety notes .................. 143 Setting the specified minimum distance ......................................... 146 Stopping ........................................ 145 Doors Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 174 Automatic locking (switch) ............... 91 Central locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ....................................... 86 Control panel ................................... 42 Display message ............................ 175 Emergency locking ........................... 92 Emergency unlocking ....................... 92 Important safety notes .................... 91 Opening (from inside) ...................... 91 Drinking and driving ......................... 139 Drive program Automatic ...................................... 133 Display ........................................... 132 Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 132 Manual ........................................... 133 Manual (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............................................... 133 Manual (vehicles with Sports package AMG) ............................... 133 Index SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 174 Drive program selector ..................... 133 Driver's door see Doors Driving abroad Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 242 Driving on flooded roads .................. 140 Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 70 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 79 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 75 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 71 BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist ............................................... 71 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS ................................................ 73 Distance warning function ............... 74 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) ............................................. 79 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 76 Important safety information ........... 70 Overview .......................................... 70 PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 80 Driving system RACE START (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ........................................ 151 Driving systems 360°camera .................................. 158 Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 166 Active Driving Assistance package ................................................. 166 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 168 Active Parking Assist ..................... 155 AIRMATIC ...................................... 151 AMG adaptive sport suspension system ........................................... 153 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 160 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 163 Cruise control ................................ 141 Display message ............................ 175 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 142 DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 148 HOLD function ............................... 150 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 165 Lane Tracking package .................. 163 PARKTRONIC ................................. Rear view camera .......................... Traffic Sign Assist .......................... Driving tips AMG ceramic brakes ..................... Automatic transmission ................. Brakes ........................................... Break-in period .............................. Downhill gradient ........................... Drinking and driving ....................... Driving in winter ............................. Driving on flooded roads ................ Driving on wet roads ...................... Exhaust check ............................... Fuel ................................................ General .......................................... Hydroplaning ................................. Icy road surfaces ........................... Limited braking efficiency on salted roads ....................................... Snow chains .................................. Wet road surface ........................... DVD video Operating (on-board computer) ..... see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 154 157 162 140 133 140 126 140 139 140 140 140 139 139 139 140 140 140 267 140 174 198 E E10 see Fuel EASY-ENTRY feature Activating/deactivating ................. 174 Function/notes ............................. 107 EASY-EXIT feature Function/notes ............................. 107 Switching on/off ........................... 174 EASY-PACK trunk box ....................... 225 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Display message ............................ 178 Function/notes ................................ 79 ECO display Function/notes ............................. 140 ECO start/stop function Automatic engine start .................. 131 Automatic engine switch-off .......... 131 Deactivating/activating ................. 131 9 10 Index General information ....................... 131 Important safety notes .................. 131 Introduction ................................... 131 Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Emergency Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 63 Emergency release Driver's door .................................... 92 Fuel filler flap ................................. 136 Trunk ............................................... 96 Vehicle ............................................. 92 Emergency spare wheel General notes ................................ 298 Important safety notes .................. 297 Removing ....................................... 298 Storage location ............................ 298 Stowing .......................................... 299 Technical data ............................... 301 Emergency Tensioning Devices Activation ......................................... 59 Emissions control Service and warranty information .... 26 Engine Check Engine warning lamp ........... 185 Display message ............................ 182 ECO start/stop function ................ 131 Engine number ............................... 306 Irregular running ............................ 131 Jump-starting ................................. 255 Starting problems .......................... 131 Starting the engine with the SmartKey ....................................... 130 Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 130 Switching off .................................. 138 Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 260 Engine electronics Problem (malfunction) ................... 131 Engine jump starting see Jump starting (engine) Engine oil Adding ........................................... 240 Checking the oil level ..................... 239 Checking the oil level using the dipstick .......................................... 239 Display message ............................ 175 Filling capacity ............................... 309 Notes about oil grades ................... 309 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 239 Temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 174 Entering an address see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 198 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 174 Characteristics ................................. 76 Deactivating/activating (button in Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............. 77 Deactivating/activating (except Mercedes AMG vehicles) ................. 77 Deactivating/activating (onboard computer, except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 174 Display message ............................ 176 Function/notes ................................ 76 General notes .................................. 76 Important safety information ........... 76 Trailer stabilization ........................... 79 Warning lamp ................................. 190 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ...................................................... 76 Exhaust check ................................... 139 Exhaust tail pipe (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 243 Exterior lighting Setting options .............................. 110 see Lights Exterior mirrors Adjusting ....................................... 107 Dipping (automatic) ....................... 107 Folding in when locking (on-board computer) ...................................... 174 Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 107 Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 107 Setting ........................................... 107 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 107 Storing the parking position .......... 107 Eyeglasses compartment ................. 223 Index Before changing ............................. Fuse box in the engine compartment .............................................. Fuse box in the trunk ..................... Important safety notes .................. F Favorites Adding ........................................... 207 Deleting ......................................... 208 Displaying and calling up ............... 207 Moving ........................................... 208 Overview ........................................ 207 Renaming ....................................... 208 Filler cap see Refueling Flat tire MOExtended tires .......................... 247 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 247 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 248 see Emergency spare wheel Floormats ........................................... 235 Frequencies Mobile phone ................................. 304 Two-way radio ................................ 304 Fuel Additives ........................................ 309 Consumption statistics .................. 174 Displaying the current consumption ................................................ 174 Displaying the range ...................... 174 Driving tips .................................... 139 Fuel gauge ....................................... 35 Grade (gasoline) ............................ 308 Important safety notes .................. 307 Premium-grade unleaded gasoline ................................................. 308 Problem (malfunction) ................... 137 Refueling ........................................ 135 Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 308 Fuel filler flap Emergency release ........................ 136 Opening ......................................... 136 Fuel level Calling up the range (on-board computer) ...................................... 174 Fuel tank Capacity ........................................ 308 Problem (malfunction) ................... 137 Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool kit) ...................................................... 246 Fuses Allocation chart ............................. 260 260 261 261 260 G Garage door opener Clearing the memory ..................... 235 General notes ................................ 232 Important safety notes .................. 232 Opening/closing the garage door .. 234 Programming (button in the rearview mirror) ................................... 232 Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 233 Gear indicator (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 174 Gear or selector lever (cleaning guidelines) ......................................... 243 Genuine parts ...................................... 25 Glove box ........................................... 223 Google™ Local Search see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 198 H Hazard warning lamps ...................... 110 Head bags Display message ............................ 179 Head restraints Adjusting ....................................... 106 Adjusting (rear) .............................. 106 see NECK-PRO head restraints see NECK-PRO luxury head restraints Headlamps Cleaning system (notes) ................ 311 Fogging up ..................................... 110 see Automatic headlamp mode Heating see Climate control High-beam headlamps Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 112 Display message ............................ 175 Switching on/off ........................... 111 Hill start assist .................................. 130 11 12 Index HOLD function Activating ....................................... Deactivating ................................... Function/notes ............................. Home address see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. Hood Closing ........................................... Important safety notes .................. Opening ......................................... Hydroplaning ..................................... 151 151 150 198 239 238 238 140 I Ignition lock see Key positions Immobilizer .......................................... 82 Indicator and warning lamps COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS .............................................. 194 Indicator lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Indicators see Turn signals Instrument cluster Overview .......................................... 35 Settings ......................................... 174 Warning and indicator lamps ........... 36 Instrument cluster lighting .............. 174 Interior lighting Automatic control .......................... 113 Delayed switch-off (on-board computer) ...................................... 174 Emergency lighting ........................ 113 Manual control ............................... 113 Overview ........................................ 113 Reading lamp ................................. 113 Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting (on-board computer) ............................................. 174 Setting the brightness of the display/switch (on-board computer) .. 174 Setting the color of the ambient lighting (on-board computer) ......... 174 Internet Selecting/setting access data ....... 217 Setting up an Internet connection .. 217 iPod® see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 198 J Jack Storage location ............................ 246 Using ............................................. 287 Jump starting (engine) ...................... 255 K Key positions KEYLESS-GO .................................. 128 SmartKey ....................................... 127 KEYLESS-GO Deactivation ..................................... 87 Display message ............................ 175 Locking ............................................ 87 Removing the Start/Stop button ... 129 Start/Stop button .......................... 128 Starting the engine ........................ 130 Unlocking ......................................... 87 Kickdown Driving tips .................................... 133 Manual drive program .................... 134 Knee bag .............................................. 52 L Lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating ................. Function/information .................... Lane Tracking package ..................... Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors ................................................ License plate lamp (display message) ................................................... Light function, active Display message ............................ Light sensor (display message) ....... Lights Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off ....... Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 174 165 163 174 66 175 175 175 174 112 Index Automatic headlamp mode ............ 111 Cornering light function ................. 111 Hazard warning lamps ................... 110 High beam flasher .......................... 111 High-beam headlamps ................... 111 Light switch ................................... 110 Low-beam headlamps .................... 111 Parking lamps ................................ 111 Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting (on-board computer) ............................................. 174 Setting the brightness of the display/switch (on-board computer) .. 174 Setting the color of the ambient lighting (on-board computer) ......... 174 Standing lamps .............................. 111 Switching the daytime running lamps on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 174 Switching the daytime running lamps on/off (switch) .................... 111 Switching the exterior lighting delayed switch-off on/off (onboard computer) ............................ 174 Switching the surround lighting on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 174 Turn signals ................................... 111 List of access data New provider ................................. 218 List of mobile phone network providers With the selected provider ............. 218 Loading guidelines ............................ 222 Locking see Central locking Locking (doors) Automatic ........................................ 91 Emergency locking ........................... 92 From inside (central locking button) .................................................. 91 Locking centrally see Central locking Locking verification signal (onboard computer) ............................... 174 Low-beam headlamps Display message ............................ 175 Switching on/off ........................... 111 Lumbar support Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support ................................................ 106 M M+S tires ............................................ 266 Malfunction message see Display messages Matte finish (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 243 mbrace Call priority .................................... 231 Display message ............................ 175 Downloading destinations (COMAND) ..................................... 227 Downloading routes ....................... 227 Emergency call .............................. 229 General notes ................................ 228 Geo fencing ................................... 227 Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 227 MB info call button ........................ 231 Remote vehicle locking .................. 227 Roadside Assistance button .......... 230 Search & Send ............................... 227 Self-test ......................................... 228 Speed alert .................................... 227 System .......................................... 228 Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 227 Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis .............................................. 227 Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 227 Mechanical key Function/notes ................................ 88 Inserting .......................................... 88 Locking vehicle ................................ 92 Removing ......................................... 88 Unlocking the driver's door .............. 92 Media Interface see Separate operating instructions Memory card (audio) ......................... 174 Memory function ............................... 107 Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive 360°camera .................................. 158 Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 166 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 168 Active Parking Assist ..................... 155 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 160 13 14 Index Blind Spot Assist ............................ 163 Cruise control ................................ 141 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 142 DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 148 General notes ................................ 141 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 165 PARKTRONIC ................................. 154 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) ............................... 62 PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS) .............. 63 Rear view camera .......................... 157 Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 162 Message memory (on-board computer) .................................................. 175 Messages see Display messages Mirrors see Exterior mirrors see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) Mobile phone Authorizing .................................... 214 Connecting (Bluetooth® interface) .............................................. 212 Connecting another mobile phone ............................................ 215 De-authorizing ............................... 215 Enabling for Internet access .......... 217 Frequencies ................................... 304 Installation ..................................... 304 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 174 Transmission output (maximum) .... 304 Modifying the programming (SmartKey) ........................................... 88 MOExtended tires .............................. 247 Mounting wheels Lowering the vehicle ...................... 290 Mounting a new wheel ................... 290 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 287 Raising the vehicle ......................... 287 Removing a wheel .......................... 289 Securing the vehicle against rolling away ........................................ 287 MP3 Operation ....................................... 174 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 198 see separate operating instructions Multicontour seat .............................. 106 Multifunction display Function/notes ............................. 172 Permanent display ......................... 174 Multifunction steering wheel Operating the on-board computer .. 172 Overview .......................................... 37 Music files see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 198 N Navigation Menu (on-board computer) ............ 174 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 198 Showing/hiding the menu ............. 209 Switching to ................................... 209 see separate operating instructions NECK-PRO head restraints Operation ......................................... 61 Resetting triggered .......................... 61 NECK-PRO luxury head restraints Important safety notes .................... 61 Operation ......................................... 61 Resetting when triggered ................. 62 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ....................................................... 126 O Occupant Classification System (OCS) Conditions ....................................... Faults ............................................... Operation ......................................... System self-test ............................... Occupant safety Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. Children in the vehicle ..................... Important safety notes .................... Introduction to the restraint system .................................................. 54 58 54 56 63 64 45 44 Index Occupant Classification System (OCS) ............................................... 53 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ............................................... 45 Pets in the vehicle ........................... 70 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) ............................... 62 PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS) .............. 63 Restraint system warning lamp ........ 45 OCS Conditions ....................................... 54 Faults ............................................... 58 Operation ......................................... 54 System self-test ............................... 56 Odometer ........................................... 174 Oil see Engine oil On-board computer AMG menu ..................................... 174 Assistance menu ........................... 174 Audio menu ................................... 174 Convenience submenu .................. 174 Display messages .......................... 175 Displaying a service message ........ 242 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 146 Factory settings submenu ............. 174 Important safety notes .................. 172 Instrument cluster submenu .......... 174 Lighting submenu .......................... 174 Menu overview .............................. 174 Message memory .......................... 175 Navigation menu ............................ 174 Operation ....................................... 172 RACETIMER ................................... 174 Service menu ................................. 174 Settings menu ............................... 174 Standard display ............................ 174 Telephone menu ............................ 174 Trip menu ...................................... 174 Vehicle submenu ........................... 174 Video DVD operation ..................... 174 Online and Internet functions Enabling a mobile phone for Internet access ..................................... 217 Manually setting the access data of the mobile phone network provider .............................................. 218 Selecting the access data of the mobile phone network provider ..... 218 Setting up an Internet connection .. 217 Operating safety Declaration of conformity ................ 29 Important safety notes .................... 28 Operating system see On-board computer Operation Digital Operator's Manual ................ 23 Operator's Manual Vehicle equipment ........................... 26 Outside temperature display ........... 172 Overhead control panel ...................... 41 Override feature Rear side windows ........................... 69 P Paint code number ............................ 306 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 243 Panic alarm .......................................... 44 Parking Important safety notes .................. 137 Parking brake ................................ 138 Position of exterior mirror, frontpassenger side ............................... 107 Rear view camera .......................... 157 see PARKTRONIC Parking aid Active Parking Assist ..................... 155 see Exterior mirrors see PARKTRONIC Parking assistance see PARKTRONIC Parking brake Display message ............................ 175 Notes/function .............................. 138 PARKTRONIC Deactivating/activating ................. 155 Driving system ............................... 154 Function/notes ............................. 154 Important safety notes .................. 154 Problem (malfunction) ................... 155 Range of the sensors ..................... 154 15 16 Index Warning display ............................. 155 PASSENGER AIR BAG Display message ............................ 181 Problems (malfunction) .................. 181 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF Indicator lamp .................................. 45 Pets in the vehicle ............................... 70 Phone book see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 198 Phone call Dialing ........................................... 216 Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 243 Power washers .................................. 243 Power windows see Side windows PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) Display message ............................ 175 Operation ......................................... 62 PRE-SAFE® Brake Activating/deactivating ................. 174 Display message ............................ 175 Function/notes ................................ 80 Important safety notes .................... 80 Warning lamp ................................. 194 PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS) Display message ............................ 175 Operation ......................................... 63 Program selector button .................. 133 Protection against theft ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 82 Immobilizer ...................................... 82 Protection of the environment General notes .................................. 25 Pulling away General notes ................................ 130 Pulling away (automatic transmission) .................................................... 130 Q QR code Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1 Rescue card ..................................... 31 Qualified specialist workshop ........... 29 R RACE START (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................................................... 151 RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 174 Radio Displaying radio text ...................... 220 Overview ........................................ 219 Selecting a station ......................... 174 Setting the waveband .................... 220 Switching on .................................. 219 see separate operating instructions Radio mode see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 198 Radio-wave reception/transmission in the vehicle Declaration of conformity ................ 29 Reading lamp ..................................... 113 Rear fog lamp Display message ............................ 175 Rear seat (folding the backrest forwards/back) ...................................... 223 Rear view camera Cleaning instructions ..................... 243 Displays in the Audio display ......... 158 Displays in the COMAND display ... 158 Function/notes ............................. 157 Switching on/off ........................... 158 Rear window blind ............................ 227 Rear window defroster Problem (malfunction) ................... 123 Switching on/off ........................... 123 Rear-view mirror Dipping (automatic) ....................... 107 Refrigerant (air-conditioning system) Important safety notes .................. 311 Refueling Fuel gauge ....................................... 35 Important safety notes .................. 135 Refueling process .......................... 135 see Fuel Remote control Garage door opener ....................... 232 Programming (garage door opener) .......................................... 232 Index Replacing bulbs General notes ................................ 113 Reporting safety defects .................... 30 Rescue card ......................................... 31 Reserve (fuel tank) see Fuel Reserve fuel Display message ............................ 175 Warning lamp ................................. 185 see Fuel Residual heat (climate control) ........ 123 Restraint system Display message ............................ 179 Introduction ..................................... 44 Warning lamp ................................. 192 Warning lamp (function) ................... 45 Reverse gear (selector lever) ........... 132 Reversing feature Side windows ................................... 97 Sliding sunroof ................................. 99 Trunk lid ........................................... 93 Reversing lamps (display message) ................................................... 175 Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 27 Roller sunblind Rear window .................................. 227 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning guidelines) ......................................... 243 Roof load (maximum) ........................ 312 Route (navigation) see Route guidance (navigation) Route guidance see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 198 Route guidance (navigation) ............ 174 S Safety Children in the vehicle ..................... 64 Safety system see Driving safety systems SD memory card see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 198 Search & Send see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 198 Seat belts Adjusting the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt ......................... 49 Adjusting the height ......................... 48 Cleaning ......................................... 243 Correct usage .................................. 47 Fastening ......................................... 48 Important safety guidelines ............. 46 Introduction ..................................... 46 Releasing ......................................... 49 Switching belt adjustment on/off (on-board computer) ...................... 174 Warning lamp ................................. 186 Warning lamp (function) ................... 49 Seats Adjusting (electrically) ................... 106 Adjusting the 4 way lumbar support ................................................ 106 Adjusting the head restraint .......... 106 Cleaning the cover ......................... 243 Correct driver's seat position ........ 104 Important safety notes .................. 105 Multicontour seat .......................... 106 Seat heating problem .................... 106 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 107 Switching seat heating on/off ....... 106 Switching seat ventilation on/off .. 106 Section Trunk ............................................... 92 Securing cargo .................................. 224 Selecting stations Radio ............................................. 220 Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 243 Service menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 174 Service message see ASSYST PLUS Service products Brake fluid ..................................... 309 Coolant (engine) ............................ 310 Engine oil ....................................... 309 Fuel ................................................ 307 Important safety notes .................. 307 Refrigerant (air-conditioning system) ............................................... 311 Washer fluid ................................... 311 17 18 Index Setting access data Online and Internet ........................ 218 Setting the air distribution ............... 123 Setting the airflow ............................ 123 Setting the date/time format see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 198 Setting the language see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 198 Setting the time see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 198 Settings Factory (on-board computer) ......... 174 On-board computer ....................... 174 SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 174 Side impact air bag ............................. 52 Side marker lamp (display message) ................................................... 175 Side windows Cleaning ......................................... 243 Important safety information ........... 97 Opening/closing (all) ....................... 97 Opening/closing (front) ................... 97 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 98 Resetting ......................................... 97 SIRIUS services see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 198 Sliding sunroof Important safety notes .................... 98 Opening/closing .............................. 99 Problem (malfunction) ................... 101 Resetting ....................................... 100 SmartKey Changing the battery ....................... 89 Changing the programming ............. 88 Checking the battery ....................... 88 Display message ............................ 175 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 86 Important safety notes .................... 86 Loss ................................................. 90 Mechanical key ................................ 88 Overview .......................................... 86 Positions (ignition lock) ................. 127 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 90 Starting the engine ........................ 130 SMS see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 198 Snow chains ...................................... 267 Sockets Center console .............................. 227 General notes ................................ 227 Rear compartment ......................... 227 Trunk ............................................. 227 Under the armrest ......................... 227 Spare wheel Stowing .......................................... 299 Special seat belt retractor .................. 64 Specialist workshop ............................ 29 Speed, controlling see Cruise control Speedometer In the Instrument cluster ................. 35 Segments ...................................... 172 Selecting the display unit ............... 174 see Instrument cluster SPORT handling mode Deactivating/activating (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................ 77 Warning lamp ................................. 191 Standing lamps Display message ............................ 175 Switching on/off ........................... 111 Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function Starting (engine) ................................ 129 Steering (display message) .............. 185 Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot (DISTRONIC PLUS) Activating/deactivating ................. 174 Display message ............................ 175 Steering wheel Adjusting (electrically) ................... 107 Button overview ............................... 37 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 172 Important safety notes .................. 107 Paddle shifters ............................... 133 Steering wheel heating .................. 107 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 107 Index Steering wheel (cleaning instructions) .................................................. Steering wheel heating Switching on/off ........................... Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... Stowage areas ................................... Stowage compartments Armrest (under) ............................. Center console .............................. Cup holders ................................... Display message) ........................... Eyeglasses compartment ............... Glove box ....................................... Important safety information ......... Rear ............................................... Stowage net ................................... Under driver's seat/frontpassenger seat .............................. Stowage net ....................................... Stowage well beneath the trunk floor .................................................... Summer tires ..................................... Sun visor ............................................ Surround lighting (on-board computer) .................................................. Suspension tuning AIRMATIC ...................................... SETUP (on-board computer) .......... Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ................................................. 243 107 133 174 222 223 223 227 175 223 223 222 223 223 223 223 226 266 227 174 152 174 123 T Tachometer ........................................ 172 Tail lamps Display message ............................ 175 Tank see Fuel tank Tank content Fuel gauge ....................................... 35 Technical data Capacities ...................................... 307 Emergency spare wheel ................. 301 Information .................................... 304 Tires/wheels ................................. 291 Vehicle data ................................... 312 Telephone Accepting a call ..................... 174, 216 Authorizing a mobile phone (connecting) ......................................... 214 Connecting a mobile phone (general information) ............................ 212 De-authorizing (disconnecting) a mobile phone ................................. 215 Ending an active call ...................... 216 Entering phone numbers ................ 216 Establishing the connection from the mobile phone ........................... 214 Making a call ................................. 216 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 174 Number from the phone book ........ 174 Reconnecting a mobile phone automatically ................................. 215 Redialing ........................................ 174 Rejecting a call .............................. 216 Rejecting/ending a call ................. 174 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 198 Switching between mobile phones ........................................... 215 Using the telephone ....................... 216 Telephone number Entering ......................................... 216 Temperature Coolant .......................................... 172 Coolant (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 174 Engine oil (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 174 Outside temperature ...................... 172 Setting (climate control) ................ 123 Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 174 Tire pressure Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 272 Checking manually ........................ 270 Display message ............................ 183 Maximum ....................................... 270 Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 250 Notes ............................................. 268 Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 250 Recommended ............................... 267 Tire pressure loss warning system General notes ................................ 270 Important safety notes .................. 271 19 20 Index Restarting ...................................... Tire pressure monitor Checking the tire pressure electronically ........................................ Function/notes ............................. General notes ................................ Important safety notes .................. Radio type approval for the tire pressure monitor ........................... Restarting ...................................... Warning lamp ................................. Warning message .......................... Tire-change tool kit ........................... TIREFIT kit .......................................... Tire pressure not reached .............. Tire pressure reached .................... Tires Aspect ratio (definition) ................. Average weight of the vehicle occupants (definition) .................... Bar (definition) ............................... Changing a wheel .......................... Characteristics .............................. Checking ........................................ Curb weight (definition) ................. Definition of terms ......................... Direction of rotation ...................... Display message ............................ Distribution of the vehicle occupants (definition) ............................ DOT (Department of Transportation) (definition) ............................. DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............................................... GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) (definition) ..................................... General notes ................................ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (definition) ........................................... GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) (definition) .............................. Important safety notes .................. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment (definition) ...... Information on driving .................... Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... Labeling (overview) ........................ Load bearing index (definition) ...... 271 273 272 272 272 274 274 195 274 246 248 250 250 285 284 283 286 283 265 285 283 286 183 286 284 283 284 291 284 284 264 284 264 284 280 285 Load index ..................................... 282 Load index (definition) ................... 284 Maximum load on a tire (definition) ............................................... 285 Maximum loaded vehicle weight (definition) ..................................... 284 Maximum permissible tire pressure (definition) ............................. 285 Maximum tire load ......................... 282 Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 285 MOExtended tires .......................... 266 Optional equipment weight (definition) ............................................ 285 PSI (pounds per square inch) (definition) ........................................... 285 Replacing ....................................... 286 Service life ..................................... 266 Sidewall (definition) ....................... 285 Speed rating (definition) ................ 284 Storing ........................................... 286 Structure and characteristics (definition) ..................................... 283 Temperature .................................. 279 TIN (Tire Identification Number) (definition) ..................................... 285 Tire bead (definition) ...................... 285 Tire pressure (definition) ................ 285 Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 284 Tire size (data) ............................... 291 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating .................... 280 Tire tread ....................................... 265 Tire tread (definition) ..................... 285 Total load limit (definition) ............. 286 Traction ......................................... 279 Traction (definition) ....................... 285 Tread wear ..................................... 279 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards ...................................... 278 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (definition) .................... 284 Wear indicator (definition) ............. 285 Wheel and tire combination ........... 293 Wheel rim (definition) .................... 284 see Flat tire Top Tether ............................................ 67 Tow-starting Emergency engine starting ............ 260 Index Important safety notes .................. 257 Towing a trailer ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 79 Towing away Important safety guidelines ........... 257 Installing the towing eye ................ 258 Removing the towing eye ............... 259 With both axles on the ground ....... 259 With the rear axle raised ................ 259 Towing eye ......................................... 246 Traffic reports see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 198 Traffic Sign Assist Function/notes ............................. 162 Important safety notes .................. 162 Instrument cluster display ............. 162 Transmission see Automatic transmission Transmission position display ......... 132 Transmission position display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 132 Transporting the vehicle .................. 259 Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 243 Trip computer (on-board computer) .................................................. 174 Trip odometer Calling up ....................................... 174 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 174 Trunk Emergency release .......................... 96 Important safety notes .................... 92 Locking separately ........................... 95 Opening/closing (automatically from inside) ...................................... 95 Opening/closing (automatically from outside) ................................... 94 Opening/closing (manually from outside) ............................................ 93 Trunk lid Display message ............................ 175 Opening dimensions ...................... 312 Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 312 Turn signals Display message ............................ 175 Switching on/off ........................... Two-way radio Frequencies ................................... Installation ..................................... Transmission output (maximum) .... Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate 111 304 304 304 U Unlocking Emergency unlocking ....................... 92 From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ............................. 91 V Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 227 Vehicle Correct use ...................................... 30 Data acquisition ............................... 31 Display message ............................ 185 Equipment ....................................... 26 Individual settings .......................... 174 Limited Warranty ............................. 30 Loading .......................................... 275 Locking (in an emergency) ............... 92 Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 86 Lowering ........................................ 290 Maintenance .................................... 27 Parking for a long period ................ 138 Pulling away ................................... 130 Raising ........................................... 287 Reporting problems ......................... 30 Securing from rolling away ............ 287 Towing away .................................. 257 Transporting .................................. 259 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 92 Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 86 Vehicle data ................................... 312 Vehicle data ....................................... 312 Vehicle dimensions ........................... 312 Vehicle emergency locking ................ 92 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate .............. 306 Vehicle level AIRMATIC ...................................... 151 21 22 Index Vehicle tool kit .................................. Video see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. Video (DVD) ........................................ VIN Seat ............................................... Type plate ...................................... Voice Control System see Separate operating instructions 246 198 174 306 306 W Warning and indicator lamps ABS ................................................ 189 Brakes ........................................... 188 Check Engine ................................. 185 Coolant .......................................... 193 Distance warning ........................... 194 ESP® .............................................. 190 ESP® OFF ....................................... 191 Fuel tank ........................................ 185 General notes ................................ 185 Overview .......................................... 36 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ............... 45 Reserve fuel ................................... 185 Restraint system ............................ 192 Seat belt ........................................ 186 SPORT handling mode ................... 191 Tire pressure monitor .................... 195 Warranty .............................................. 26 Washer fluid Display message ............................ 175 Wheel and tire combinations Tires ............................................... 293 Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 290 Wheel chock ...................................... 287 Wheels Changing a wheel .......................... 286 Checking ........................................ 265 Cleaning ......................................... 243 Emergency spare wheel ................. 297 General notes ................................ 291 Important safety notes .................. 264 Information on driving .................... 264 Interchanging/changing ................ 286 Mounting a new wheel ................... 290 Mounting a wheel .......................... 287 Removing a wheel .......................... 289 Storing ........................................... 286 Tightening torque ........................... 290 Wheel size/tire size ....................... 291 Window curtain air bag Operation ......................................... 53 Windows see Side windows Windshield Defrosting ...................................... 123 Windshield washer fluid see Windshield washer system Windshield washer system Adding washer fluid ....................... 241 Important safety notes .................. 311 Windshield wipers Problem (malfunction) ................... 115 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 113 Switching on/off ........................... 113 Winter driving Important safety notes .................. 266 Slippery road surfaces ................... 140 Snow chains .................................. 267 Winter tires M+S tires ....................................... 266 Wiper blades Cleaning ......................................... 243 Important safety notes .................. 113 Replacing ....................................... 113 Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 243 Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop Z ZONE function Switching on/off ........................... 123 Digital Operator's Manual Introduction The printed Operator's Manual provides information about the safe operation of your vehicle. The Digital Operator's Manual additionally describes further functions and equipment installed in your vehicle. The vehicle functions and functions of Audio 20 or COMAND are described in the Digital Operator's Manual. You can call up the Digital Operator's Manual via Audio 20 or COMAND. i You will not incur any costs when calling up the Digital Operator's Manual. The Digital Operator's Manual works without connecting to the Internet. There are three ways to access the topics of the Digital Operator's Manual: RVisual search The visual search allows you to explore your vehicle "virtually". Starting from either the vehicle exterior view or interior view, you can access many of the different topics covered by the Digital Operator's Manual. To access the vehicle interior section, select the "Vehicle interior" view. RKeyword search The keyword search allows you to search for a keyword by entering characters. Further information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual in the "Audio 20" or "COMAND" section under the "Character entry (telephony)" keyword. RContents You can select individual sections in the contents. Operation Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual Press the Ø button in the center console. The overview relating to the vehicle appears. X Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item by turning 3 or pressing 7 the controller. X Confirm 7 the message about the warning and safety notes. The basic menu for the Digital Operator's Manual appears. X Operating the Digital Operator's Manual General notes Please observe the information about the operation of the controller (Y page 206). Content pages The content pages can be accessed by means of a visual search, a keyword search or using the contents. i The Digital Operator's Manual is deactivated for safety reasons while driving. To scroll forwards/backwards: turn 3 the controller. X To display in full-screen or animation: slide 8 the controller to the left :. X 23 Digital Operator's Manual 24 To select information texts or save bookmarks: slide 9 the controller to the right ;. X To select a link: slide 6 the controller downwards =. X To exit a content page: select the % symbol ?. X To call up the basic menu of the Digital Operator's Manual: select Þ symbol A. X To switch functions to Audio 20 or COMAND using the buttons on the center console: press the $, %, Õ or Ø button. The selected menu appears. The Digital Operator's Manual remains open in the background. X Introduction Protection of the environment General notes H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of comprehensive environmental protection. The objectives are for the natural resources that form the basis of our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner that takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tire wear are affected by these factors: Roperating conditions of your vehicle Ryour personal driving style You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind: Operating conditions: Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con- sumption. make sure that the tire pressures are correct. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. Rremove roof racks once you no longer need them. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. Ralways have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Personal driving style: Ralways Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle is stationary. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. frequent, sudden acceleration and braking. Ravoid Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. off the engine in stationary traffic. Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consumption. Rswitch Environmental concerns and recommendations Wherever the operating instructions require you to dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or re-use them. Observe the relevant environmental rules and regulations when disposing of materials. In this way you will help to protect the environment. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts H Environmental note Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. They are covered by the same Limited Warranty entitlements as new parts. ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devices, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: Rdoors Rdoor pillars sills Rseats Rcockpit Rinstrument cluster Rcenter console Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems. Have aftermarket accessories installed at a qualified specialist workshop. Rdoor Z 25 26 Introduction You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes. This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to strict quality control. Every part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should therefore be used. More than 300,000 different genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are available for Mercedes-Benz models. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers provide quick and reliable parts service. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) when ordering genuine MercedesBenz parts (Y page 306). Operator's Manual Vehicle equipment This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The original purchase agreement lists all systems installed in your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle. Service and vehicle operation Warranty The implied warranty for your vehicle applies in accordance with the warranty terms and conditions in the Service and Warranty Information booklet. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will replace and repair all factory-installed parts in accordance with the following warranty terms and conditions: RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty System Warranty REmission Performance Warranty RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon laws) Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories warranties. These are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. REmission i Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. The new Service and Warranty Information booklet will be posted to you. Introduction Information for customers in California Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price, if after a reasonable number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs: (1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times, and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the need for its repair, (2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for its repair, or (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days. Please send your written notice to: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 Maintenance The Service and Warranty Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be done at regular intervals. Always have the Service and Warranty Booklet with you when you bring the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The service advisor will record every service for you in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Roadside Assistance The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program offers technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (USA) 1-800-387-0100 (Canada) For additional information, refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both in your vehicle literature portfolio. Change of address or change of ownership In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of Address Change" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service Center (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contacting you in a timely manner should the need arise. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the entire literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used car, please send us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in Z 27 28 Introduction the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. Vehicle operation outside the USA and Canada If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that: Rservice facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available. Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic converter may not be available. Leaded fuel may cause damage to the catalytic converter. Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage. Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For details, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the following addresses. In the USA Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Operating safety Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or any required repairs carried out, this can result in malfunctions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident. Always have the prescribed service/maintenance work as well as any required repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire. When driving off road or on unpaved roads, check the vehicle's underside regularly. In particular, remove parts of plants or other flammable materials which have become trapped. In the case of damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other networked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high curb or an unpaved road Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a curb or a hole in the road Ra heavy object strikes the undercarriage or parts of the chassis In situations like this, the body, the undercarriage, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of Introduction an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed to. If the underbody paneling is damaged, combustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody paneling. If these materials come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they can catch fire. In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If on continuing your journey you notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Declarations of conformity Vehicle components which receive and/or transmit radio waves USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device." Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you connect equipment to the diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it may affect the operation of the vehicle systems. As a result, the operating safety of the vehicle could be affected. There is a risk of an accident. Do not connect any equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle. G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another. ! If the engine is switched off and equipment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge. Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions test during the main inspection. Qualified specialist workshop An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a qualified specialist workshop. It has the necessary specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This is especially the case for work relevant to safety. Z 29 30 Introduction Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet. Always have the following work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center: Rwork relevant to safety Rservice and maintenance work Rrepair work Ralterations, installation work and modifications Rwork on electronic components Correct use If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information when driving your vehicle: Rthe safety notes in this manual vehicle technical data Rtraffic rules and regulations Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles Rthe Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the problem diagnosed and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or contact us at one of the following addresses. In the USA Customer Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Customer Relations Department Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Reporting safety defects USA only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov Limited Warranty ! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. Introduction QR codes for the rescue card The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric cables. You can find more information under http:// portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/ content/asportal/en/communication/ informationen_fuer/QRCode.html. Data stored in the vehicle Data recording This vehicle is capable of recording diagnostic information relating to vehicle operation, malfunctions, and user settings. This may include information about the performance or status of various systems, including but not limited to, engine, throttle, steering or brake systems, that is stored and can be read out with suitable devices, particularly when the vehicle is serviced. The data obtained is used to properly diagnose and service your vehicle or to further optimize and develop vehicle functions. COMAND/mbrace If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or mbrace, additional data about the vehicle’s operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the location of the vehicle may be compiled through COMAND or the mbrace system. For additional information please refer to the COMAND User Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Conditions. Event data recorders This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as during air bag deployment or when hitting a road obstacle. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: Rhow various systems in your vehicle are operating Rwhether or not the driver and passenger seat belts are fastened Rhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal and Rhow fast the vehicle is traveling This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, can combine the EDR data with the type of personal identification data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal matters as a tool in accident reconstruction, accident claims, and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Z 31 32 Introduction ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel. MBUSA will not share EDR data with others without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the lessee. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law. Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, altering, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint System Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted. This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of February 2013, 13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs. Information on copyright General information Information on license for free and opensource software used in your vehicle and its electronic components is available on the following website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ opensource 33 Cockpit ................................................. 34 Multifunction steering wheel ............. 37 Center console .................................... 38 Overhead control panel ...................... 41 Door control panel .............................. 42 At a glance Instrument cluster .............................. 35 34 Cockpit At a glance Cockpit : Function Page Steering wheel paddle shifters ~ Function F Adjusts the steering wheel manually 107 G Adjusts the steering wheel electrically Steering wheel heating 107 107 H Cruise control lever 142 I Parking brake ; Combination switch 111 = Instrument cluster 35 ? Horn A DIRECT SELECT lever 132 B PARKTRONIC warning display 154 J Diagnostics connection C Overhead control panel 41 K Opens the hood D Climate control systems 118 L Releases the parking brake E Ignition lock Start/Stop button 127 128 M Light switch ~ Page ~ 29 238 ~ 110 Instrument cluster 35 Instrument cluster At a glance Displays Function Page Speedometer with segments ~ ; Multifunction display ~ = Tachometer ~ ? Coolant temperature ~ : Function A Information on displaying the outside temperature in the multifunction display can be found under "Outside temperature display" (Y page 172). i Set the instrument cluster lighting via the on-board computer, see the Digital operator's manual. Fuel gauge Fuel filler flap location indicator 8: the fuel filler cap is on the right-hand side. Page 36 Instrument cluster At a glance Warning and indicator lamps Function Page Function Page G ü Seat belt 186 H ÷ ESP® in MercedesAMG vehicles 191 194 I ? Coolant 193 190 J K High-beam headlamps ~ #! Turn signals ~ K A $ Brakes (USA only) 188 L Low-beam headlamps ~ B J Brakes (Canada only) 188 L T Parking lamps ~ C ! ABS 189 M D 6 Restraint system R This lamp has no function E ; Check Engine N 8 Reserve fuel F h Tire pressure monitor ÷ ESP® M SPORT handling mode in Mercedes-AMG vehicles 190 ; · Distance warning = å ESP® OFF ? : 191 44 ~ 195 ~ Multifunction steering wheel 37 At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Function Page : Multifunction display ~ ; Audio 20 or COMAND display = ? Vehicles with Audio 20: switches on voice-operated control for navigation (see manufacturer's operating instructions) Vehicles with COMAND: switches on the Voice Control System (see the separate operating instructions) 8 Mute WX Adjusts the volume ~ Rejects or ends a call Exits the telephone book/ redial memory 6 Makes or accepts a call Switches to the redial memory ~ ~ Function ? =; Selects a menu 9: Selects a submenu or scrolls through lists a Confirms a selection Hides display messages % Back Vehicles with Audio 20: switches off voice-operated control of the navigation (see manufacturer's operating instructions) Vehicles with COMAND: switches off the Voice Control System (see the separate operating instructions) Page ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 38 Center console At a glance Center console Center console, upper section Function Page Function : Audio system or COMAND ~ B 4 5 Indicator lamp ; c Seat heating 106 C = s Seat ventilation £ Hazard warning lamps ? c PARKTRONIC D u Roller sunblind in the rear window A ¤ ECO start/stop function (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ~ 154 ~ Page 54 110 ~ Center console 39 At a glance Center console, lower section Function Page Stowage compartment Ashtray Cigarette lighter Socket Cup holder 222 227 227 227 227 F Cup holder 227 G e Sets the suspension tuning 152 E Function Page H É Sets the vehicle level 151 I Stowage compartment with Media Interface 223 J Ú Selects the drive program 133 K Audio or COMAND controller 40 Center console At a glance Center console, lower section (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Function Page F Cup holder ~ G Engages park position P 138 H Selector lever 132 L I Ashtray Cigarette lighter Socket ~ ~ ~ M Audio or COMAND controller N å ESP® ~ O Drive program selector J K Function Page Stowage compartment with Media Interface ~ ß Calls up or saves the suspension setting ~ à Sets the suspension tuning ~ 77 ~ Overhead control panel 41 At a glance Overhead control panel : ; = ? A B C Function Page u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off ~ | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off ~ p Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off ~ ï MB Info call button (mbrace system) 3 Opens/closes the sliding sunroof Function D Buttons for the garage door opener E Microphone for mbrace (emergency call system), telephone and Voice Control System (see the separate operating instructions) F F Roadside Assistance call button (mbrace system) ~ p Switches the lefthand reading lamp on/off ~ c Switches the front interior lighting on/off ~ ~ 99 G SOS button (mbrace system) ~ Rear-view mirror ~ Page G H 232 42 Door control panel At a glance Door control panel Function Page r45= Stores settings for the seat, exterior mirrors and steering wheel ~ Adjusts the seats electrically ~ % & Unlocks/locks the vehicle ~ ? Opens the door ~ A 7Zö\ Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically ~ : ; = B C D Function Page W Opens/closes the side windows ~ n Activates/deactivates the override feature for the side windows in the rear compartment ~ p Opens/closes the trunk lid 95 43 Useful information .............................. 44 Panic alarm .......................................... 44 Occupant safety .................................. 44 Pets in the vehicle ............................... 70 Driving safety systems ....................... 70 Protection against theft ..................... 82 Safety Children in the vehicle ........................ 64 Occupant safety 44 Safety Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 29). Panic alarm Occupant safety Introduction to the restraint system The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. The restraint system can also reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident. The restraint system comprises: RSeat belt system bags RChild restraint system RChild seat securing systems The components of the restraint system work in conjunction with each other. They can only deploy their protective function if, at all times, all vehicle occupants: RAir Rhave To activate: press the ! button : for approximately one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed. X To deactivate: press the ! button : again. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. or, on vehicles with KEYLESS GO: X Press the Start/Stop button. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle. X fastened their seat belts correctly (Y page 47) Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraint properly (Y page 105). As the driver, you also have to make sure that the steering wheel is adjusted correctly. Observe the information relating to the correct driver's seat position (Y page 104). You also have to make sure that an air bag can inflate properly if deployed (Y page 50). An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag increases the level of protection for vehicle occupants in the event of an accident. For example, if, in the event of an accident, the protection offered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bags are not deployed. When an accident occurs, only the air bags that increase protection in that particular accident situation are deployed. However, seat belts and air bags generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. Information on restraint system operation can be found under "Triggering of the Emergency Tensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 59). For more information about children traveling with you in the vehicle and on child restraint systems, see "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 64). Important safety notes G WARNING Modifications to the restraint system may cause it to no longer work as intended. The restraint system may then not perform its intended protective function and may fail in an accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Never modify parts of the restraint system. Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic components or their software. If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: for further information contact our Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1 800 367 6372). Restraint system warning lamp The functions of the restraint system are checked after the ignition is switched on and at regular intervals while the engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time. The 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are in operational readiness. A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint system warning lamp: Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched on Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the engine running Rlights up again while the engine is running G WARNING If restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with a high rate of vehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emergency Tensioning Device or air bag, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Have the restraint system checked and repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp : is part of the Occupant Classification System (OCS). The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp informs you about the status of the frontpassenger front air bag. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp: Ris lit: the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. Rdoes not light up: the front-passenger front air bag is enabled. If, in the event of an accident, all deployment criteria are met, the front-passenger front air bag is deployed. Z 45 Safety Occupant safety 46 Occupant safety Safety Depending on the person in the frontpassenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag must either be deactivated or enabled; see the following points. You must make sure of this both before and during a journey. RChildren in a child restraint system: whether the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated depends on the installed child restraint system, and the age and size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe the notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 53) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 64). There you will also find instructions on rearward and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat. RAll other persons: depending on the classification of the person in the frontpassenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated (Y page 53). Be sure to observe the notes on "Seat belts“ (Y page 46) and "Air bags" (Y page 50). There you can also find information on the correct seat position. Seat belts Introduction Seat belts are the most effective means of restricting the movement of vehicle occupants in the event of an accident or the vehicle rolling over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior or being ejected from the vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle occupant in the best position in relation to the air bag. The seat belt system comprises: RSeat belts REmergency Tensioning Devices for the front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear RSeat belt force limiters for the front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outlet quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extracted any further. The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close against the body. However it does not pull the vehicle occupant back in the direction of the backrest. The Emergency Tensioning Device does not correct an incorrect seat position or the routing of an incorrectly fastened seat belt. When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps to reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant. The seat belt force limiters for the front seats are synchronized with the front air bags, which absorb part of the deceleration force. This can reduce the force exerted on the vehicle occupants during an accident. ! If the front-passenger seat is not occupied, do not engage the seat belt tongue in the buckle on the front-passenger seat. Otherwise, in the event of an accident, the Emergency Tensioning Device and frontpassenger front air bag may be triggered and would need to be replaced. Important safety notes The use of seat belts and child restraint systems is required by law in: Rall 50 states U.S. territories Rthe District of Columbia Rall Canadian provinces Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle occupants should correctly fasten their seat belts before starting the journey. Rthe G WARNING If the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protect as intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause additional injury, for example, in an accident, during braking or when abruptly changing direc- tion. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants are seated properly with a correctly fastened seat belt. G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. G WARNING Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannot fasten the seat belt correctly without an additional suitable restraint system. If the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protect as intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause additional injury, for example, in an accident, during braking or an abrupt change of direction. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. For this reason, always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraint systems. If a child younger than twelve years old and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child Ralways observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Children in the vehicle" section of this Operator's Manual (Y page 64) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant classification system (OCS)" (Y page 53) G WARNING The seat belts may not perform their intended protective function if: Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely dirty, bleach or dyed Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia reels have been modified Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy when necessary. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia reels. Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn out and clean. Following an accident, have the seat belts checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use seat belts that have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Proper use of the seat belts Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 46). All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also make sure that all vehicle occupants are always wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle is in motion. Z 47 Safety Occupant safety 48 Occupant safety When fastening the seat belt, always make sure that: Safety Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to the belt buckle belonging to that seat. Rthe seat belt is tight across your body. Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. Rthe seat belt is not twisted. Only then can the forces which occur be distributed over the area of the belt. Rthe shoulder section of the belt is always routed across the center of your shoulder. The shoulder section of the belt must not come into contact with your neck or be routed under your arm. Where possible, adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height. Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low down as possible across your lap. The lap belt must always be routed across your hip joints and not across your abdomen. This applies particularly to pregnant women. If necessary, push the lap belt down to your hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder section of the belt. Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, pointed or fragile objects. If you have such items located on or in your clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, store these in a suitable place. Ronly one person is using a seat belt at a time. Infants and children must never travel sitting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event of an accident, they could be crushed between the vehicle occupant and seat belt. Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Also ensure that there are never objects between a person and the seat, e.g. cushions. Seat belts are only intended to secure and restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the "Loading guidelines" for securing objects, luggage or loads (Y page 222). Fastening and adjusting the seat belts Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 46) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 47). Basic illustration Adjust the seat (Y page 104). The seat backrest must be in an almost vertical position. X Pull the seat belt smoothly from belt outlet = and engage belt tongue ; into belt buckle :. The seat belt on the driver’s seat and the front-passenger seat may be tightened automatically, see "Belt adjustment" (Y page 49). X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body. X 49 Safety Occupant safety The shoulder section of the seat belt must always be routed across the center of the shoulder. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary. To raise: slide the belt outlet upwards. The belt outlet will engage in various positions. X To lower: hold belt outlet release ? and slide belt outlet downwards. X Let go of belt outlet release ? in the desired position and make sure that the belt outlet engages. Seat belt adjustment All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are equipped with a special seat belt retractor to securely fasten child restraint systems in the vehicle. Further information can be found under "Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 64). The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. This function adjusts the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants. The belt strap is tightened slightly when: X Releasing seat belts ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Basic illustration X Press release button :, hold belt tongue ; firmly and guide it back towards belt outlet =. Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle and Rthe ignition is switched on The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain retraction force if any slack is detected between the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on and off in the on-board computer. Belt warning for the driver and front passenger The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts. It may Z Safety 50 Occupant safety light up continuously or flash. In addition, there may be a warning tone. Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds each time the engine is started. If, after six seconds, the driver or front-passenger seat belt has not been fastened and the doors are closed, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up. As soon as the driver's and frontpassenger seat belts are fastened or a front door is opened again, the 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the engine is started, an additional warning tone will sound. This warning tone stops after six seconds or when the driver's seat belt is fastened. If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) once and the driver's and frontpassenger seat belts are not fastened, a warning tone sounds. A warning tone also sounds with increasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the driver or front passenger have fastened their seat belts. If the driver or front passenger unfasten their seat belts during the journey, the seat belt warning is activated again. i For more information on the 7 seat belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat belts" (Y page 186). Air bags Introduction The installation point of an air bag can be recognized by the AIR BAG symbol. An air bag complements the correctly fastened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. The air bag provides additional protection in applicable accident situations. Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The different air bag systems function independently from one another (Y page 59). However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities. It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury caused by an air bag due to the high speed at which the air bag must be deployed. Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not sit in the correct seat position, the air bag cannot protect as intended and could even cause additional injury when deployed. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. To avoid hazardous situations, always make sure that all of the vehicle's occupants: Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly, including pregnant women Rare sitting correctly and maintain the greatest possible distance to the air bags Rfollow the following instructions Always make sure that there are no objects between the air bag and the vehicle's occupants. RAdjust the seats properly before beginning your journey. Always make sure that the seat is in an almost upright position. The center of the head restraint must support the head at about eye level. RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats as far back as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside. This allows the air bag to be fully deployed. RAlways lean against the backrest while driving. Do not lean forwards or lean against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air bags. RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dashboard, for example. Your feet may oth- erwise be in the deployment area of the air bag. RFor this reason, always secure persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint systems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot be worn correctly. If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also observe the following notes: RAlways secure children under twelve years of age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable child restraint systems. RChild restraint systems should be installed on the rear seats. ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat when the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated (Y page 45). RAlways observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 53) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 64) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an air bag from functioning correctly. Before starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make sure that: are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an air bag. Rthere are no objects between the seat, door and B-pillar. Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang on the grab handles or coat hooks. Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows, rear side trim or side walls. Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place. G WARNING If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer function correctly. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects to it. G WARNING Sensors to control the air bags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not performed correctly to the doors or door paneling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The air bags might therefore not function properly anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door paneling carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Front air bags Rthere Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the steering wheel. Front-passenger front air bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove box. When deployed, the front air bags offer additional head and thorax protection for the occupants in the front seats. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp informs you about the status of the frontpassenger front air bag (Y page 45). Z 51 Safety Occupant safety 52 Occupant safety The front-passenger front air bag will only deploy if: Safety Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensor readings, detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied (Y page 53) Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is not lit (Y page 54) Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a high accident severity Knee bags Front side impact air bags : and rear side impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer bolster of the seat backrest. When deployed, the side impact air bag offers additional thorax protection. However, it does not protect the: Rhead Rneck Rarms Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steering column and front-passenger knee bag ; under the glove box. The driver's and frontpassenger knee bags are triggered together with the front air bags. The driver's and front-passenger knee bags offer additional thigh, knee and lower leg protection for the occupants in the front seats. Side impact air bags G WARNING Unsuitable seat covers could restrict or even prevent the deployment of the air bags integrated into the seats. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. In addition, the function of the Occupant Classification System (OCS) could be restricted. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz. In the event of a side impact, the side impact air bag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. The side impact air bag on the frontpassenger side (front) deploys under the following conditions: Rthe OCS system detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied or Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle, the side impact air bag on the frontpassenger side deploys if an appropriate accident situation occurs. In this case, deployment is independent of whether the frontpassenger seat is occupied or not. Pelvis air bags G WARNING Unsuitable seat covers could restrict or even prevent the deployment of the air bags integrated into the seats. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. In addition, the function of the Occupant Classification System Occupant safety Pelvis air bags : deploy below next to the outer seat cushions. When activated, the pelvis air bag enhances the level of protection of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. The pelvis air bag is deployed on the side of the impact. The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger side does not deploy under the following conditions: ROCS has detected that the front-passenger seat is unoccupied. front-passenger seat belt is not fastened. If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle, the pelvis air bag on the frontpassenger side deploys if an appropriate accident situation occurs. In this case, deployment is independent of whether the frontpassenger seat is occupied or not. Rthe Window curtain air bags Safety (OCS) could be restricted. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz. 53 Window curtain air bags : are integrated into the side of the roof frame and deployed in the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar. When deployed, the window curtain air bag enhances the level of protection for the head. However, it does not protect the chest or arms. In the event of a side impact, the window curtain air bag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. If the system determines that they can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be deployed in other accident situations (Y page 59). Occupant Classification System (OCS) Introduction The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the person in the front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, the frontpassenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag are either enabled or deactivated. The system does not deactivate: Rthe side impact air bag Rthe pelvis air bag Rthe window curtain air bag Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices Z 54 Occupant safety Prerequisites To be classified correctly, the front passenger must sit: Occupant Classification System operation (OCS) Safety Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly an almost upright position with their back against the seat backrest Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possible If the front passenger does not observe these conditions, OCS may produce a false classification, e.g. because the front passenger: Rin Rtransfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised from the seat cushion If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the correct positioning of the child restraint system. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cushions. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function correctly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp : shows you whether the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock or on vehicles with KEYLESSGO, press the Start/Stop button once or twice. The system carries out self-diagnostics. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up for approximately six seconds. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp then displays the status of the frontpassenger front air bag. If the status of the front-passenger front air bag changes while the vehicle is in motion, an air bag display message may appear in the instrument cluster (Y page 181). When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always pay attention to the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Be aware of the status of the front-passenger front air bag both before and during the journey. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp: Ris lit: the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. Rdoes not light up: the front-passenger front air bag is enabled. If, in the event of an accident, all deployment criteria are met, the front-passenger front air bag is deployed. G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the frontpassenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and the frontpassenger front air bag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved back as far back as possible. Rthe person is seated correctly. Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front-passenger front air bag is correct. G WARNING If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front-passenger front air bag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the air bag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that the front-passenger front air bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. G WARNING If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and you position the front-passenger seat too close to the dashboard, the child could, in the event of an accident: Rcome into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt sash guide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt sash guide and the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. If OCS determines that: Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a child of up to twelve months old, in a standard child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. But even in the case of a twelve-month-old child, in a standard child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp can go out after the system self-test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated. The result of the classification is dependent on, among other factors, the child restraint system Z 55 Safety Occupant safety Safety 56 Occupant safety and the child's stature. It is recommended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after the system self-test depending on the result of the classification or, alternatively, goes out. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Alternatively, a person of smaller stature can sit on a rear seat. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature should not use the front-passenger seat. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person of a stature corresponding to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp goes out after the system self-test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated. If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 64). When OCS is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously. The front-passenger front air bag is deactivated in this case and does not deploy during an accident. Have the system checked by qualified technicians as soon as possible. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The front-passenger seat should only be repaired at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the seat cushion is damaged, have the necessary repair work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat accessories that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not mean that the front-passenger front air bag will also deploy. The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front air bag is either enabled or deactivated. System self-test G DANGER If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up during the system selftest, then the system is malfunctioning. The front-passenger front air bag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with high deceleration. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. In this case the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. G DANGER If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident. In this case, the front-passenger front air bag cannot perform its intended protective function, e.g. when a person is seated in the frontpassenger seat. That person could, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and the frontpassenger front air bag is enabled or disa- Occupant safety Safety bled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat Rthe person is seated properly with a correctly fastened seatbelt Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved back as far back as possible If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit when it should not, the frontpassenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. 57 G WARNING Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect OCS operation. This could result in the front-passenger air bag not functioning as intended during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the frontpassenger seat. The backrest of the forwardfacing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the front-passenger seat. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp displays the status of the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 54). For more information about the OCS, see "Problems with the Occupant Classification System" (Y page 58). Z 58 Occupant safety Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 56). Safety Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The PASSENGER AIR The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is BAG OFF indicator incorrect. lamp lights up and X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the perremains lit, even son on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 54). though the frontX If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the passenger seat is occufront-passenger seat may not be used. pied by an adult or a X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized person of a stature corMercedes-Benz Center. responding to that of an adult. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up and/or does not stay on. The front-passenger seat is: OCS is malfunctioning. X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child seat. X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat. Runoccupied X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the Roccupied with the seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the frontweight of a child up passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and to twelve months old the child restraint system being pulled too tightly. in a child restraint system X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system. Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accordingly. X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the seat. X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off, do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recommended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Deployment of Emergency Tensioning Devices and air bags Important safety notes G WARNING The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a deployed air bag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. G WARNING A deployed air bag no longer offers any protection and cannot provide the intended protection in an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have a deployed air bag replaced. It is important for your safety and that of your passenger to have deployed air bags replaced and to have any malfunctioning air bags repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags continue to perform their protective function for the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash. G WARNING Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices which have been triggered immediately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to trigger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardous situations. This procedure is reversible. If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released. The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard, but it may cause short-term breathing difficulties in people with asthma or other respiratory problems. To avoid this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle or open the windows as soon as it is safe to do so. Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal. In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/ index.cfm. Method of operation During the first stage of a collision, the restraint system control unit evaluates important physical data relating to vehicle deceleration or acceleration, such as: Rduration Rdirection Rintensity Based on the evaluation of this data, the restraint system control unit triggers the Emergency Tensioning Devices during a frontal or rear collision. An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be triggered, if: Rthe ignition is switched on Rthe components of the restraint system are operational; see "Restraint system warning lamp" (Y page 45) Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on the respective front-passenger seat The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rear compartment are triggered independently of the lock status of the seat belts. If the restraint system control unit detects a more severe accident, further components of Z 59 Safety Occupant safety Safety 60 Occupant safety the restraint system are activated independently of each other in certain frontal collision situations: RFront air bags and driver's knee bag RWindow curtain air bag, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt The front-passenger front air bag is activated or deactivated depending on the person on the front-passenger seat. The frontpassenger front air bag can only deploy in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp (Y page 45). Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. During the first deployment stage, the front air bag is filled with propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front air bag is fully deployed with the maximum amount of propellant gas if a second deployment threshold is reached within a few milliseconds. The activation threshold of the Emergency Tensioning Devices and the air bag are determined by evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration which occurs at various points in the vehicle. This process is preemptive in nature. Deployment should take place in good time at the start of the collision. The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the direction of the force are essentially determined by: Rthe distribution of forces during the collision Rthe collision angle Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle Rthe characteristics of the object with which the vehicle has collided Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a decisive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor do they provide an indication of air bag deployment. The vehicle can be deformed considerably, without an air bag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of deceleration is not high. Conversely, air bags may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. This is the case if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs as a result. If the restraint system control unit detects a side impact or if the vehicle rolls over, the applicable components of the restraint system are activated independently of each other depending on the apparent type of accident. RSide impact air bags and pelvis air bag on the side of impact, independently of the Emergency Tensioning Device and the use of the seat belt on the driver's seat and outer seats in the second row - the OCS system detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied or - the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat RWindow curtain air bag on the side of impact, independently of the use of the seat belt and independently of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied REmergency Tensioning Devices, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection in this situation RWindow curtain air bags on the driver's and front-passenger side in certain situations when the vehicle rolls over, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The different air bag systems work independently of each other. How the air bag system works is determined by the severity of the accident detected, especially the vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the apparent type of accident: Rfrontal collision impact Rrollover Rside NECK-PRO head restraints/NECKPRO luxury head restraints Important safety notes G WARNING The function of the head restraint may be impaired if you: objects such as coat hangers to the head restraints, for example Ruse head restraint covers If you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfill their intended protective function in the event of an accident. In addition, objects attached to the head restraints could endanger other vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury. Do not attach any objects to the head restraints and do not use head restraint covers. protection will not be available in the event of another rear-end collision. You can see that a NECK-PRO head restraint/NECK-PRO luxury head restraint has been triggered if it is tilted forward and can no longer be adjusted. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the functionality of the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a rear-end collision. Resetting a triggered NECK-PRO head restraint/NECK-PRO luxury head restraint NECK-PRO head restraints Rattach Method of operation NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints offer additional protection against head and neck injuries. In the event of a rear collision of a certain severity, the NECKPRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints on the driver's and front-passenger seats are moved forwards and upwards. This provides better head support. If the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints have been triggered in an accident, reset the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints on the driver's seat and the front-passenger seat (Y page 61). Otherwise, the additional Do not insert your finger between the cushion of the head restraint and the cover. Pay particular attention while resetting the NECKPRO head restraints. X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion forwards in the direction of arrow :. X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion down as far as it will go in the direction of arrow ;. X With your hand flat, firmly push the NECKPRO head restraint cushion backwards in the direction of arrow = until it engages. X Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-PRO head restraint. i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints requires a lot of strength. If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-PRO head Z 61 Safety Occupant safety 62 Occupant safety restraints, have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. NECK-PRO luxury head restraints PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection system) Introduction Safety In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE® takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. Important safety notes Do not insert your finger between the cushion of the head restraint and the cover. Pay particular attention while resetting the NECKPRO luxury head restraints. X Remove resetting tool : from the vehicle document wallet. X Slide resetting tool : into guide ; between the NECK-PRO luxury head restraint and the rear cover of the head restraint. X Push resetting tool : downwards until you hear the head restraint deployment mechanism engage. X Pull out resetting tool :. X With your hand flat, firmly push the NECKPRO luxury head restraint cushion backwards in the direction of arrow = until it engages. X Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-PRO luxury head restraint. X Put resetting tool : back into the vehicle document wallet. i If you have difficulty resetting the NECKPRO luxury head restraints, have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats. There is a danger that the seats and/or objects could be damaged when PRE-SAFE® is activated. Although your vehicle is equipped with PRESAFE®, the possibility of injury in the event of an accident cannot be ruled out. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. Function PRE-SAFE® intervenes: Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when BAS is activated Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when phys- ical limits are exceeded and the vehicle understeers or oversteers severely Ron vehicles with the Driving Assistance package: if BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully or the radar sensor system detects an imminent danger of collision in certain situations PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected: Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned. front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavorable position. Rthe Occupant safety the vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof and the side windows are closed so that only a small gap remains. Rvehicles with a multicontour seat or active multicontour seat: the air pressure in the side bolsters of the backrest is increased. If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the belt pre-tensioning. On vehicles with multicontour seats/active multicontour seats, the air pressure in the side bolsters is reduced again. All settings made by PRE-SAFE® can then be reversed. If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced: X Move the seat backrest or seat back slightly when the vehicle is stationary. The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and the locking mechanism is released. The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. You will find information on the convenience function under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 49). PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection system PLUS) Introduction PRE-SAFE® PLUS is only available in vehicles with the Driving Assistance package. Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE® PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rearend collision is imminent. In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes preemptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. Important safety notes PRE-SAFE® The intervention of PLUS cannot prevent an imminent collision. The driver is not warned about the intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS. PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not intervene if the vehicle is backing up. When driving, or when parking or exiting a parking space with assistance from Active Parking Assist, PRE-SAFE® PLUS will not apply the brakes. Function PRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes in certain situations if the radar sensor system detects an imminent head-on or rear-end collision. PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected: Rif the radar sensor system detects that a head-on collision is imminent, the seat belts are pre-tensioned. Rif the radar sensor system detects that a rear-end collision is imminent: - the brake pressure is increased if the driver applies the brakes when the vehicle is stationary. - the seat belts are pre-tensioned. The PRE-SAFE® PLUS braking application is canceled: Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed when a gear is engaged Rif the risk of a collision passes or is no longer detected Rif DISTRONIC PLUS indicates an intention to pull away If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, the original settings are restored. Automatic measures after an accident Immediately after an accident, the following measures are implemented, depending on the type and severity of the impact: Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated emergency lighting is activated Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked Rthe front side windows are lowered Rthe Z Safety Rif 63 64 Children in the vehicle Safety Rvehicles with a memory function: the electrically adjustable steering wheel is raised Rthe engine is switched off and the fuel supply is cut off Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergency call Children in the vehicle Important safety notes Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. Children are generally better protected there. If a child younger than twelve years old and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes in this section in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 53) G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. G WARNING If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If the child restraint system is subjected to direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Children may burn themselves on these parts, particularly on the metal parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with you, always ensure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, let it cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children. Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 46) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 47). A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a three-point seat belt fits properly without a booster seat. Rshift Special seat belt retractor G WARNING If the seat belt is released while driving, the child restraint system will no longer be secured properly. The special seat belt retractor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a Children in the vehicle All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driver's seat belt, are equipped with a special seat belt retractor. When activated, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt cannot slacken once the child seat is secured. Installing a child restraint system: Make sure you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outlet. X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle. X Activating the special seat belt retractor: Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia reel retract it again. While the seat belt is retracting, you should hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt retractor is enabled. X Push the child restraint system down so that the seat belt is tight and does not loosen. X Removing the child restraint system and deactivating the special seat belt retractor: Make sure you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. X Press the release button of the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt tongue back towards the belt sash guide. The special seat belt retractor is deactivated. X Child restraint system The use of seat belts and child restraint systems is required by law in: Rall 50 states U.S. territories Rthe District of Columbia Rall Canadian provinces You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Rthe G WARNING If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions and the notes on use. Please ensure, that the base of the child restraint system is always resting completely on the seat cushion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under or behind the child restraint system. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine covers. G WARNING If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly or is not secured, it can come loose in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always install child restraint systems properly, even if they are not being used. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. You will find further information on stowing objects, luggage or loads under "Loading guidelines" (Y page 222). Z Safety portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot be immediately refastened. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate the special seat belt retractor and secure the child restraint system properly. 65 Safety 66 Children in the vehicle G WARNING Child restraint systems or their securing systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident can no longer protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Replace child restraint systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident as soon as possible. Have the securing systems on the child restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop, before you install a child restraint system again. The securing systems of child restraint systems are: Rthe seat belt system Rthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings Rthe Top Tether anchorages If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the information on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 53). There you will also find information on deactivating the front-passenger front air bag. All child restraint systems must meet the following standards: Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2 Confirmation that the child restraint system corresponds to the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This confirmation can also be found in the installation instructions that are included with the child restraint system. Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing system G WARNING LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems do not offer sufficient protective effect for children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs (22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt integrated in the child restraint system. In the event of an accident, a child might not be restrained correctly. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg), only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems with which the child is also secured with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available. Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. Before every trip, make sure that the LATCHtype (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged correctly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings RU.S. When installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, fold protective caps ; of securing rings : inwards. X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings :. ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for specially designed child restraint systems on the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings : for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child Children in the vehicle Safety restraint systems are installed on the left and right rear seats. Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also be used and can be installed using the vehicle's seat belt system. Install the child seat according to the manufacturer's instructions. Top Tether Introduction Top Tether provides an additional connection between the child restraint system secured with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount and the vehicle. This helps reduce the risk of injury even further. If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt, this should always be used. Important safety notes G WARNING If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they could fold forwards in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. As a result, child restraint systems cannot perform their intended protective function. Rear seat backrests that are not locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always lock rear seat backrests after installing a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock verification indicator. Adjust the rear seat backrests so that they are in an upright position. If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. A warning tone also sounds. Top Tether anchorages The Top Tether anchorage points are located in the rear compartment behind the head restraints. 67 Move head restraint : upwards. Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage =. X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. X Route Top Tether belt A under head restraint : between the two head restraint bars. X Hook Top Tether hook ? into Top Tether anchorage =. X Make sure that Top Tether belt A is not twisted. X Tension Top Tether belt A. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. X Fold down cover ; of Top Tether anchorage =. X Move head restraint : back down again slightly if necessary (Y page 106). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt A. X X Z 68 Children in the vehicle Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat Safety General notes Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install the child restraint system on a rear seat. If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be sure to read and follow the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 53). You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as a result of: Ran incorrectly categorized person in the front-passenger seat Rthe unintentional deactivation of the frontpassenger front air bag Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child restraint system, e.g. too close to the dashboard Rearward-facing child restraint system If it is absolutely necessary to install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always make sure that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 45) is the front-passenger front air bag deactivated. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Forward-facing child restraint system If it is absolutely necessary to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as possible. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front- passenger seat. The backrest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt outlet and the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Child-proof locks Important safety notes G WARNING If children are traveling in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thus endangering other people or road users Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always activate the child-proof locks and override feature if children are traveling in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Override feature for: Rthe Rthe rear doors (Y page 69) rear side windows (Y page 69) Children in the vehicle G WARNING 69 Child-proof locks for the rear doors If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. G WARNING If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If the child restraint system is subjected to direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Children may burn themselves on these parts, particularly on the metal parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with you, always ensure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, let it cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Safety Rshift You secure each door individually with the child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door secured with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened from the outside. X To activate: press the child-proof lock lever up in the direction of arrow :. X Make sure that the child-proof locks are working properly. X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock lever down in the direction of arrow ;. Override feature for the rear side windows X To activate/deactivate: press button ;. If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the rear side windows is disabled. Operation is only possible using the switches in the driver's door. If indicator lamp : is off, operation is possible using the switches in the rear compartment. Z 70 Driving safety systems Pets in the vehicle Safety G WARNING If you leave animals unattended or unsecured in the vehicle, they could press buttons or switches, for example. As a result, they could: Ractivate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby endangering other road users Unsecured animals could also be flung around the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudden steering or braking, thereby injuring vehicle occupants. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle. Always secure animals properly during the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal transport box. Driving safety systems Overview of driving safety systems In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: (Anti-lock Braking System) (Y page 70) RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 71) RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist (Y page 71) RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (distance warning function and Adaptive Brake Assist) (Y page 73) RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (Y page 76) REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) (Y page 79) RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 79) RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 80) RABS Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for maintaining the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in lane. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. The driving safety systems described only work as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tires and the road surface. Pay particular attention to the information regarding tires, recommended minimum tire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tires" section (Y page 264). In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) General information ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking. The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running. ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph (8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70). G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 189) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 176). Braking If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal vigorously until the braking situation is over. X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force. X If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving. BAS (Brake Assist System) General information BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70). G WARNING If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. There is a risk of an accident. In an emergency braking situation, depress the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. Braking X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist General information BAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian and reduce the effects of such a collision. If BAS PLUS detects a danger of collision, you are assisted when braking. i Pay attention to the important safety notes in the "Driving safety systems" section (Y page 70). BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with the Driving Assistance package. For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system and the camera system must be operational. With the help of a sensor system and a camera system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles: Rthat are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time Rthat cross the path of your vehicle In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehicle can be detected. BAS PLUS detects pedestrians by using typical characteristics such as the body contours and posture of a person standing upright. Z 71 Safety Driving safety systems Safety 72 Driving safety systems If the radar sensor system or the camera system is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS functions are restricted or no longer available. The brake system is still available with complete brake boosting effect and BAS. Recognition by the radar sensor system is also impaired in the event of: i Observe the restrictions described in the "Important safety notes" section“ (Y page 72). Rthere Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is interference by other radar sources BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, BAS PLUS may: are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line Rvehicles quickly moving into the radar sensor system detection range Recognition by the camera system is also impaired in the event of: Rintervene Rdirt Important safety notes G WARNING unnecessarily Rnot intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. G WARNING BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify people, this is especially the case if they are moving. BAS PLUS cannot intervene in these cases. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. G WARNING BAS PLUS does not react: Rto small people, e.g. children animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rwhen cornering As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Rto In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the recognition can be impaired. on the camera or if the camera is covered Rthere is glare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun being low in the sky Rdarkness Rif: - pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path of the vehicle - the camera system no longer recognizes a pedestrian as a person due to special clothing or other objects - a pedestrian is concealed by other objects - the typical outline of a person is not distinguishable from the background Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Following damage to the windshield, have the configuration and operation of the camera system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Driving safety systems To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates the brake force necessary if: Ryou approach an obstacle, and RBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collision When driving at a speed under 20 mph (30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal, BAS PLUS is activated. The increase in brake pressure will be carried out at the last possible moment. When driving at a speed above 20 mph (30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal sharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises the brake pressure to a value adapted to the traffic situation. BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in hazardous situations with vehicles in front within a speed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 155 mph (250 km/h). Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), BAS PLUS may react to: Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle Robjects crossing your path and that are recognized in the detection range of the sensors i If BAS PLUS demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously. X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes function as usual, if: Ryou release the brake pedal. Rthere is no longer a risk of collision. Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle. Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. Ryou activate kickdown. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS General information COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS consists of a distance warning function with an autonomous braking function and adaptive Brake Assist. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. If you do not react to the visual and audible collision warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation, the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS adaptive Brake Assist assists you. Activating or deactivating COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is activated after every ignition cycle. You can activate or deactivate COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS in the on-board computer (Y page 174). When deactivated, the distance warning function and the autonomous braking function are also deactivated. If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the assistance graphics display. Important safety notes In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors is snow or heavy rain Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Rthere Z Safety Function 73 74 Driving safety systems Safety Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line Rnew vehicles or after a service on the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS system Observe the notes in the section on breaking-in (Y page 126). Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Distance warning function General information The distance warning function can help you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If the distance warning function detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 70). G WARNING The distance warning function does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering Thus, the distance warning function cannot provide a warning in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Rto G WARNING The distance warning function cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, the distance warning function may: Rgive an unnecessary warning give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and do not rely solely on the distance warning function. Rnot Function Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), the distance warning function warns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound, and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front. or X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so. Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the system to display a warning. With the help of the radar sensor system, the distance warning function can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. Up to a speed of around 44 mph (70 km/h), the distance warning function can also react to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or parked vehicles. Autonomous braking function If the driver does not react to the distance warning signal in a critical situation, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can assist with the autonomous braking function. The autonomous braking function: Rgives the driver more time to react to critical driving situations Rcan help the driver to avoid an accident or Rreduces the effects of an accident The autonomous braking function is available in the following speed ranges: Rfrom 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 65 mph (105 km/h) for moving objects Rfrom 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 31 mph (50 km/h) for stationary objects If the autonomous braking function requires a particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously. Adaptive Brake Assist i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70). Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assistance in hazardous situations at speeds above 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technology to assess the traffic situation. G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can: Rintervene unnecessarily intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. Rnot G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not intervene in all critical conditions. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Rto Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause Brake Assist to intervene. If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the brake system remains available with full brake boosting effect and BAS. With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the distance warning signal can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of collision with the vehicle in front, it calculates the braking force necessary to avoid a collision. If you apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive Brake Assist will automatically increase the braking force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions. X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will work normally again if: Ryou release the brake pedal. Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision. Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle. Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated. If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously. Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph (250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capable of reacting to moving objects that have already been detected as such at least once over the period of observation. Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist reacts to stationary obstacles. Z 75 Safety Driving safety systems 76 Driving safety systems ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Safety General notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70). ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. power transmission between the tires and the road surface. If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilize the vehicle during braking. ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70). ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehicles with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP®. Traction control brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. In addition, more drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. Traction control remains active, even if you deactivate ESP®. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70). G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. ESP® Drive on carefully. Have checked at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or performance tests may only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. Before you operate the vehicle on such a dynamometer, please consult a qualified workshop. You could otherwise damage the drive train or the brake system. Vehicles without 4MATIC: observe the notes on ESP® (Y page 259) when towing the vehicle with a raised rear axle. ESP® is only deactivated if the å warning lamp is lit continuously. If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® not available due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 190) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 176). i Only use wheels with the recommended tire sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. Characteristics of ESP® General information If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically active. If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. If ESP® intervenes: Do not deactivate ESP® under any circumstances. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. X ECO start/stop function The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle stops moving. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. Driving safety systems ESP® Deactivating/activating Mercedes AMG vehicles) (except Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70). You can select between the following states of ESP®: RESP® RESP® is activated. is deactivated. G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an extended period with ESP® deactivated. You could otherwise damage the drivetrain. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. Deactivating/activating ESP® You can deactivate or activate ESP® via the on-board computer (Y page 174). ESP® deactivated: The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. ESP® activated: The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability. torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces. Rtraction control is still activated. RESP® still provides support when you brake. Rengine Deactivating/activating ESP® (Mercedes AMG vehicles) Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70). You can select between the following states of ESP®: RESP® is activated. handling mode is activated. ® RESP is deactivated. RSPORT G WARNING When SPORT handling mode is activated, there is a greater risk of skidding and accidents. Only activate SPORT handling mode in the situations described in the following. G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Z Safety ESP® remains in its previously selected status. Example: if ESP® was deactivated before the engine was switched off, ESP® remains deactivated when the engine is switched on again. 77 Driving safety systems 78 Safety Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an extended period with ESP® deactivated. You could otherwise damage the drivetrain. In the following situations, it may be better to activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate ESP®: using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel Ron specially designated roads when the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics are desired Driving in SPORT handling mode or without ESP® requires an extremely qualified and experienced driver. The SPORT handling mode message appears in the multifunction display. X To deactivate SPORT handling mode: briefly press button :. The M SPORT handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X To deactivate ESP®: press button : until the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. The ÷ OFF message appears in the multifunction display. X To activate ESP®: briefly press button :. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ESP® ON message appears in the multifunction display. Rwhen Rin i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. Deactivating/activating ESP® Characteristics of activated SPORT handling mode If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP® only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited degree. When SPORT handling mode is activated: RESP® X To activate SPORT handling mode: briefly press button :. The M SPORT handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. only improves driving stability to a limited degree. Rtraction control is still activated. Rengine torque is restricted to a limited degree and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces. RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly. Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster does not flash. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. Driving safety systems RESP® no longer improves driving stability. torque is restricted to a limited degree and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces. Rtraction control is still activated. RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is it activated if you brake firmly and ESP® intervenes. RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, it is also not activated if you brake firmly and ESP® intervenes. RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly. Rengine ESP® trailer stabilization General information If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to swerve, ESP® assists you in this situation. ESP® slows the vehicle down by braking and limiting the engine output until the vehicle/ trailer combination has stabilized. Important safety notes G WARNING If road and weather conditions are poor, trailer stabilization will not be able to prevent the vehicle/trailer combination from swerving. Trailers with a high center of gravity can tip over before ESP® can detect this. There is a risk of an accident. Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions. If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer combination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilize the vehicle/trailer combination by depressing the brake firmly. ESP® trailer stabilization is active above speeds of about 65 km/h. ESP® trailer stabilization does not work if ESP® is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunction. EBD (electronic brake force distribution) General information EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 70). G WARNING If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps (Y page 189) as well as display messages (Y page 178). ADAPTIVE BRAKE i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70). ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function (Y page 150) and hill start assist (Y page 130). Z Safety If you deactivate ESP®: 79 80 Driving safety systems PRE-SAFE® Brake Safety General information PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or a pedestrian, and reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically as well as by automatic braking. i Pay attention to the important safety notes in the "Driving safety systems" section (Y page 70). PRE SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles with the Driving Assistance Plus package. For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system and the camera system must be switched on and be operational. With the help of the radar sensor system and the camera system, PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that are in front of your vehicle for an extended period of time. In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehicle can be detected. PRE-SAFE® Brake detects pedestrians using typical characteristics such as the body contours and posture of a person standing upright. i Observe the restrictions described in the "Important safety notes" section“ (Y page 80). Important safety notes G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehi- cle by a partial application of the brakes if a danger of collision is detected. There may be a collision unless you brake yourself. Even after subsequent full application of the brakes a collision cannot always be avoided, particularly when approaching at too high a speed. There is a risk of an accident. Always apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so. In the event of a partial application of the brakes, the vehicle is braked with up to 50% of the full braking pressure. G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic conditions. In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rnot give a warning or intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake, especially if PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly identify people, especially if they are moving. In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot intervene. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake, especially if PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. In order to maintain the appropriate distance to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision, you must apply the brakes yourself. G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react: Rto small people, e.g. children animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering Rto As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neither give warnings nor intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Driving safety systems In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the recognition can be impaired. Recognition by the radar sensor system is also impaired in the event of: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line relative to the center of your vehicle Recognition by the camera system is also impaired in the event of: Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is covered Rthere is glare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun being low in the sky Rdarkness Rif: - pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path of the vehicle - the camera system no longer recognizes a pedestrian as a person due to special clothing or other objects - a pedestrian is concealed by other objects - the typical outline of a person is not distinguishable from the background Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Following damage to the windshield, have the configuration and operation of the camera system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Function X To activate/deactivate: activate or deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board computer (Y page 174). If the PRE-SAFE® Brake is not activated, the æ symbol appears in the multifunction display. Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), this function warns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately to defuse the situation. or X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicle automatically under the following conditions: Rthe driver and front-passenger have their seat belts fastened and Rthe vehicle speed is between approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h) At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph (70 km/h) PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect: Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle i If there is an increased risk of collision, preventive passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated. If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front remains and you do not brake, take evasive action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle may perform automatic emergency braking, up to the point of full brake application. Automatic emergency braking is not performed until immediately prior to an imminent accident. Z Safety Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. 81 82 Protection against theft You can prevent the intervention of the PRESAFE® Brake at any time by: ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further. kickdown. Rreleasing the brake pedal. The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is ended automatically if: Safety Ractivating Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle. is no longer a risk of collision. Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in front of your vehicle. Rthere Protection against theft Immobilizer The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey. X To activate with the SmartKey: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off and open the driver's door. X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle. i The immobilizer is always deactivated when you start the engine. In the event that the engine cannot be started (yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system is armed after approximately 15 seconds. X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed and you open: Ra door vehicle with the mechanical key Rthe trunk lid Rthe hood X To switch the alarm off with the SmartKey: press the % or & button on the SmartKey. The alarm is switched off. or X Remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The alarm is switched off. Rthe Protection against theft X 83 To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO: grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. X Safety or Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that triggered it, for example. i If the alarm continues for more than 30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call system automatically notifies the Customer Assistance Center. This is done either by text message or data connection. The emergency call system sends the message or data provided that: Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace service. Rthe mbrace service has been activated properly. Rthe necessary mobile phone network is available. Z 84 85 Useful information .............................. 86 SmartKey ............................................. 86 Doors .................................................... 91 Trunk .................................................... 92 Side windows ...................................... 97 Opening and closing Sliding sunroof .................................... 98 86 SmartKey Opening and closing Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 29). SmartKey Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. ! Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected. Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicinity of powerful electrical installations. Do not keep the SmartKey: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey. Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil. Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case. This can affect the functionality of the SmartKey. SmartKey functions Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. Rshifting G WARNING If you attach heavy or large objects to the SmartKey, the SmartKey could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This could cause the engine to be switched off. There is a risk of an accident. : & To lock the vehicle ; F To unlock the trunk lid = % To unlock the vehicle X To lock centrally: press the & button. The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks: Rthe doors trunk lid Rthe fuel filler flap The turn signals flash once when unlocking and three times when locking. You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible Rthe SmartKey KEYLESS-GO General notes Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle. To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle. X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface :. X Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface ; for an extended period. For further information on the convenience closing feature, see the Digital Operator's Manual, keyword "Convenience closing". X Locking/unlocking centrally You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the SmartKey with you. You can combine the functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the & button on the SmartKey. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the SmartKey and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m). A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example: Rwhen the external door handles are touched Rwhen starting the engine Rwhile the vehicle is in motion X To unlock the trunk lid: pull the handle on the trunk lid. The vehicle only unlocks the trunk lid. Deactivating and activating If you do not intend to use a SmartKey for an extended period of time, you can deactivate the KEYLESS-GO function of the SmartKey. The SmartKey will then use very little power, thereby conserving battery power. For the purposes of activation/deactivation, the vehicle must not be nearby. X To deactivate: press the & button on the key twice in rapid succession. The battery check lamp of the SmartKey flashes twice briefly and lights up once, then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated (Y page 88). X To activate: press any button on the key or insert the key into the ignition lock. KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features are available again. Z Opening and closing signal can be activated and deactivated using the on-board computer (Y page 174). In the dark, the surround lighting additionally comes on when activated in the on-board computer (Y page 174). 87 SmartKey 88 Changing the settings of the locking system Removing the mechanical key You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Opening and closing Mechanical key General notes If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the SmartKey, use the mechanical key. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door or the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 82). There are several ways to turn off the alarm: X To deactivate the alarm with the key: press the % or & button on the key. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESSGO: press the Start/Stop button in the ignition lock. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle. or or X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESSGO. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. X Push release catch : in the direction of the arrow and at the same time remove mechanical key ; from the SmartKey. For further information about: Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 92) the trunk (Y page 96) Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 92) Runlocking Inserting the mechanical key X Push mechanical key ; completely into the SmartKey until it engages and release catch : is back in its basic position. SmartKey battery Checking the battery If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically. X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X Press the & or % button. The battery is working properly if battery check lamp : lights up briefly. SmartKey Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle i You can get a battery at any qualified specialist workshop. Replacing the battery You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 88). Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your palm until battery = falls out. X Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other contaminants. X X Insert the front tabs of battery compartment cover : into the housing and then press to close it. Insert mechanical key ; into the SmartKey. X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on the vehicle. X Press mechanical key ; into the opening in the SmartKey in the direction of the arrow until battery compartment cover : opens. Do not hold battery compartment cover : closed while doing so. X Remove battery compartment cover :. X Z Opening and closing The battery is discharged if battery check lamp : does not light up briefly. X Change the battery (Y page 89). i If the SmartKey battery is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: 89 90 SmartKey Problems with the SmartKey Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Opening and closing You can no longer lock The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. or unlock the vehicle X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 88) and replace it if necusing the SmartKey. essary (Y page 89). If this does not work: X Unlock (Y page 92) or lock (Y page 92) the vehicle using the mechanical key. The SmartKey is faulty. X Unlock (Y page 92) or lock (Y page 92) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. You can no longer lock The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. or unlock the vehicle X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 88) and replace it if necusing KEYLESS-GO. essary (Y page 89). If this does not work: Unlock (Y page 92) or lock (Y page 92) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Unlock (Y page 92) or lock (Y page 92) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning. X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote control function: X Unlock (Y page 92) or lock (Y page 92) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. You have lost a SmartKey. Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well. X Doors Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You have lost the mechanical key. X The engine cannot be started using the SmartKey. the on-board voltage is too low. X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior lighting, and try to start the engine again. Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. If necessary, have the locks changed as well. If this does not work: X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 253). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 255). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine cannot be The vehicle is locked. started using KEYLESS- X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again. GO. The SmartKey is in the vehicle. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. Doors Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. You should preferably place luggage or loads in the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 222). Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RUnlocking and opening doors from the inside RCentrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside RAutomatic locking feature Z Opening and closing X 91 Trunk 92 Opening and closing Unlocking the driver's door (mechanical key) If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with the SmartKey, use the mechanical key. X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 88). X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 88). X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. X X Turn the mechanical key clockwise to position 1. The door is unlocked. Turn the mechanical key back and remove it. X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lid are locked. X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey. X X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise to position 1. The door is unlocked. Turn the mechanical key back and remove it. X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey. X If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 82). Locking the vehicle (mechanical key) If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the SmartKey, use the mechanical key. X Open the driver's door. X Close the front-passenger door, the rear doors and the trunk lid. X Press the locking button (Y page 91). X Check whether the locking knobs on the front-passenger door and the rear doors are still visible. Press down the locking knobs by hand, if necessary. X Close the driver's door. Trunk Important safety notes G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open. ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid (Y page 312). Trunk Ropened and closed manually from outside automatically from outside Ropened automatically from inside Rlocked separately Ropened with the emergency release button Runlocked with the mechanical key Vehicles with the trunk lid remote closing feature: the trunk lid can be: If somebody becomes trapped: Rpress the F button on the SmartKey, or Rpull or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door or Rpress the closing or locking button on the trunk lid, or Rpull on the trunk lid handle Ropened Ropened Opening/closing from outside To open and closed manually from outside Ropened/closed automatically from outside Ropened/closed automatically from inside separately Ropened with the emergency release button Runlocked with the mechanical key Rlocked Press the % button on the key. Pull handle :. X Raise the trunk lid. X Trunk lid reversing feature The trunk lid is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. It reacts if a solid object obstructs or restricts the trunk lid during the closing procedure. The trunk lid opens again automatically. The automatic reversing feature is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness when closing the trunk. X Closing G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rover the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closing movement This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. X X Pull the trunk lid down using recess :. If necessary, lock the vehicle with the & button on the SmartKey (Y page 86) or with KEYLESS-GO (Y page 87). Z Opening and closing You should preferably place luggage or loads in the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 222). Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You could otherwise lock yourself out. Vehicles without the trunk lid remote closing feature: the trunk lid can be: 93 94 Trunk Opening and closing i If KEYLESS-GO detects only one SmartKey in the trunk after it closed, the trunk lid opens again. If KEYLESS-GO detects a second SmartKey outside the vehicle, the trunk lid remains closed. Opening/closing automatically from outside Important safety notes G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the trunk lid. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: the F button on the SmartKey. or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door. Rpress the closing or locking button on the trunk lid. Rpull the trunk lid handle i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid (Y page 312). To open You can open the trunk lid automatically using the SmartKey or the handle in the trunk lid. X Press and hold the F button on the key until the trunk lid opens. or X If the trunk is unlocked, pull the trunk lid handle and release it again immediately (Y page 93). Closing Rpress Rpull G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open. ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. Example: closing and locking button (vehicle with the trunk lid remote closing feature and KEYLESSGO) X To close: press closing button : in the trunk lid. Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing feature and KEYLESS-GO: you can simultaneously close the trunk lid and lock the vehicle. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear detection range of the vehicle. X Press locking button ; in the trunk lid. If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks. i If KEYLESS-GO detects only one key in the trunk after it closed, the trunk lid opens again. If KEYLESS-GO detects a second SmartKey outside the vehicle, the trunk lid remains closed. Trunk Important safety notes G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the trunk lid. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: the F button on the SmartKey. or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door. Rpress the closing or locking button on the trunk lid. Rpull the trunk lid handle ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid (Y page 312). Opening and closing Opening and closing Opening/closing automatically from inside Rpress Rpull G WARNING The trunk lid can be automatically opened or closed even if the SmartKey is not in the vehicle. If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could activate the functions. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open. 95 To open: pull remote operating switch for trunk lid : until the trunk lid opens. X To close: press remote operating switch for trunk lid : until the trunk lid is completely closed. X You can open the trunk lid from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked. Locking the trunk separately You can lock the trunk separately. If you then unlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk remains locked and cannot be opened. X Close the trunk lid. X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 88). Z Trunk 96 Turn the mechanical key from position 1 counter-clockwise as far as it will go to position 2. The trunk is unlocked. X Turn the mechanical key back to position 1 and remove it. X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey. Opening and closing X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid lock as far as it will go. X Turn the mechanical key clockwise from position 1 to position 2. X Remove the mechanical key. X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey. X Trunk emergency release You can open the trunk lid from inside the vehicle with the emergency release button. Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key) ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. If the trunk cannot be unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 82). X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 88). X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid lock as far as it will go. X Press emergency release button : briefly. The trunk lid unlocks and opens. The trunk lid can be unlocked and opened with the trunk lid emergency release when the vehicle is stationary or while driving. The trunk lid emergency release does not open the trunk lid if the battery is disconnected or discharged. Trunk lid emergency release light: Remergency release button : flashes for 30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened. Remergency release button : flashes for 60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed. Side windows Important safety notes G WARNING While opening the side windows, body parts could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window moves. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody touches the side window during the opening procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or pull the switch to close the side window again. G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again. G WARNING If children operate the side windows they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. Activate the override feature for the rear side windows. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing movement Rduring resetting Rwhen closing the side window again manually immediately after automatic reversing This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If someone becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again. Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: ROpening and closing the side windows opening RConvenience closing feature RResetting the side windows RConvenience Side window reversing feature The side windows are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts a side window during the closing process, the side window opens again automatically. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention when closing a side window. Z Opening and closing Side windows 97 98 Sliding sunroof Problems with the side windows Opening and closing G WARNING If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions A side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide. Remove the objects. X Close the side window. X A side window cannot If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again be closed and you can- slightly: not see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. Sliding sunroof Important safety notes G WARNING While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, body parts in close proximity could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the opening and closing procedures. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or Rduring automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction The opening or closing procedure will be stopped. G WARNING If children operate the sliding sunroof they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. ! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur. Sliding sunroof Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be damaged. If somebody becomes trapped: ! The weather can change abruptly. It could start to rain or snow. Make sure that the sliding sunroof is closed when you leave the vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged if water enters the vehicle interior. automatic closing process The closing process is stopped. the switch immediately, or Rpress the switch in any direction during the Opening and closing i Resonance noises can occur in addition to the usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is open. They are caused by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. Change the position of the sliding sunroof or open a side window slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises. Rrelease Operating the sliding sunroof Opening and closing Sliding sunroof reversing feature The sliding sunroof is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof opens again automatically. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention when closing the sliding sunroof. G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rover the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closing movement Rduring resetting Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again manually immediately after automatic reversing This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. 99 Overhead control panel : To raise ; To open = To close/lower Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. i If you press the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/ closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling the switch again. X i The automatic opening and raising feature is available only when the sliding sunroof is closed. The sun protection cover automatically opens along with the sliding sunroof. You can open or close the sun protection cover manually when the sliding sunroof is raised or closed. i You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof after switching off the engine or Z 100 Sliding sunroof removing the SmartKey from the ignition lock. This function remains active for five minutes or until you open a front door. Opening and closing Resetting ! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed fully after resetting, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move smoothly. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear (Y page 99). X Keep the 3 switch pressed for another second. X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be fully opened and closed again (Y page 99). X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. Sliding sunroof 101 Problems with the sliding sunroof If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process The closing process is stopped. Rpress ! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The sliding sunroof can- If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens not be closed and you again slightly: cannot see the cause. X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and then reopens slightly: X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. Z Opening and closing G WARNING 102 103 Useful information ............................ 104 Correct driver's seat position .......... 104 Seats .................................................. 105 Steering wheel .................................. 107 Mirrors ............................................... 107 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Memory function ............................... 107 104 Correct driver's seat position Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 29). Correct driver's seat position G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjustment (Y page 105). X Make sure that seat = is adjusted properly. Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 106) When adjusting the seat, make sure that: X Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag as possible are sitting in a normal upright position Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so that your thighs are gently supported Ryou can depress the pedals properly X Check whether the head restraint is adjusted properly. When doing so, make sure that you have adjusted the head restraint so that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the center of the head restraint. X Observe the safety guidelines on steering wheel adjustment (Y page 107). X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjusted properly. Adjusting the steering wheel electrically (Y page 107) When adjusting the steering wheel, make sure that: Ryou Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent Ryou can move your legs freely Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts (Y page 46). X Check whether you have fastened seat belt ; properly (Y page 48). Seats Rfit snugly across your body Rbe routed across the middle of your shoulder Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip joints X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mirror and the exterior mirrors in such a way that you have a good view of road and traffic conditions (Y page 107). X Vehicles with a memory function: save the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror settings with the memory function (Y page 107). Seats Important safety notes G WARNING Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The seats can still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in the ignition lock. G WARNING If the head restraints are not installed or not adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. Observe the safety notes on "Air bags" (Y page 50) and "Children in the Vehicle" (Y page 64). G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While moving the seats, make sure that your hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system. G WARNING When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information: Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry the seats. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see the "Interior care" section. Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors The seat belt should: 105 106 Seats Seats, steering wheel and mirrors The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible. Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats. Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on repeatedly. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats when moving the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. i The head restraints in the front seats are installed with the NECK-PRO system (Y page 61). For this reason, it is not possible to remove the head restraints from the front seats. For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RAdjusting the seats the head restraints RAdjusting the multicontour seat RAdjusting the active multicontour seat RAdjusting the 4-way lumbar support RSwitching the seat ventilation on/off RAdjusting Switching the seat heating on/off Switching on/off G WARNING Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to become very hot. The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. Driver's and front-passenger seat The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 127). X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. X i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off. Problems with the seat heating You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Memory function Steering wheel Important safety notes G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: 107 Memory function In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RStoring RCalling settings up a stored setting the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Radjust G WARNING Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The electrically adjustable steering wheel can still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in the ignition lock. Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RAdjusting the steering wheel wheel heating REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature RSteering Mirrors In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RExterior mirrors anti-glare mirrors RParking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side RAutomatic Z 108 109 Useful information ............................ 110 Exterior lighting ................................ 110 Interior lighting ................................. 113 Replacing bulbs ................................. 113 Lights and windshield wipers Windshield wipers ............................ 113 110 Exterior lighting Useful information Lights and windshield wipers i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 29). Setting the exterior lighting Setting options Exterior lighting can be set using: Rthe light switch combination switch (Y page 111) Rthe on-board computer (Y page 174) Rthe Light switch Operation Exterior lighting General notes For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. Therefore, your vehicle is equipped with special daytime running lamps. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations. If you wish to drive during the daytime without lights, switch off the daytime running lamps function in the on-board computer (Y page 174). Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RHazard warning lamps fogged up on the inside RHeadlamps 1 W Left-hand standing lamps 2 X Right-hand standing lamps 3 T Parking lamps, license plate and instrument cluster lighting 4 à Automatic headlamp mode, control- led by the light sensor 5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. X Turn the light switch to Ã. The exterior lighting (except the parking/ standing lamps) switches off automatically if you: Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in position 0 Exterior lighting Information in the Digital Operator's Manual 111 Cornering light function In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RAutomatic headlamp mode running lamps RLow-beam headlamps RParking lamps RStanding lamps Combination switch The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. It can only be activated when the low-beam headlamps are switched on. Active: Rif : ; = ? High-beam headlamps Turn signal, right High-beam flasher Turn signal, left In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RTurn signal RHigh-beam RHigh-beam headlamps flasher you are driving at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or turn the steering wheel Rif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn the steering wheel The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes. Cornering light function with traffic circle function: The cornering light function is activated on both sides before entering a traffic circle through an evaluation of the current GPS position of the vehicle. It remains active until after the vehicle has left the traffic circle. In this way, pedestrians crossing the road, for example, are illuminated by your vehicle in good time. Lights and windshield wipers RDaytime 112 Exterior lighting Adaptive Highbeam Assist Lights and windshield wipers General notes have lights, or may recognize them too late. In this or similar situations, the automatic highbeam headlamps will not be deactivated or activated regardless. There is a risk of an accident. Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and switch off the high-beam headlamps in good time. Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be restricted if there is: Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or You can use this function to set the headlamps to change between low beam and high beam automatically. The system recognizes vehicles with their lights on, either approaching from the opposite direction or traveling in front of your vehicle, and consequently switches the headlamps from high beam to low beam. The system automatically adapts the lowbeam headlamp range depending on the distance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the high-beam headlamps. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel. Important safety notes G WARNING Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize road users: Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users that snow on the sensors or the sensors are obscured Rdirt Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off : ; = ? High-beam headlamps Turn signal, right High-beam flasher Turn signal, left To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display lights up when it is dark and the X Windshield wipers Interior lighting An overview of the interior lighting and the overhead control panel can be found in the "At a glance" section. In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RAutomatic interior lighting control interior lighting control RCrash-responsive emergency lighting RManual Replacing bulbs The front and rear light clusters of your vehicle are equipped with LED light bulbs. Do not replace the bulbs yourself. Contact a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Windshield wipers Switching the windshield wipers on/off 1 $ Windshield wiper off 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set to low sensitivity) 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor set to high sensitivity) 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast B í Single wipe î To wipe with washer fluid If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions. Replacing the wiper blades Important safety notes G WARNING If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you could Z Lights and windshield wipers light sensor activates the low-beam headlamps. If you are driving at speeds above approximately 16 mph (25 km/h): The headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users. If you are driving at speeds above approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other road users have been detected: The high-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up. If you are driving at speeds below approximately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road users have been detected or the roads are adequately lit: The high-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display remains lit. X To switch off: move the combination switch back to its normal position or move the light switch to another position. The _ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. 113 Windshield wipers 114 be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades. Lights and windshield wipers ! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the wiper. ! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper arm has been folded away from the windshield. Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windshield. Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windshield, the windshield may be damaged by the force of the impact. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Replacing the wiper blades Removing the wiper blades Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock or turn it to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO). X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield. X X Firmly press release knob : and pull the wiper blade upwards from the wiper arm in the direction of the arrow. Installing the wiper blades Position new wiper blade : in the retainer on the wiper arm and slide it into place in the opposite direction of the arrow. The wiper blade audibly engages. X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield. X Windshield wipers 115 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The windshield wipers are jammed. Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windshield wipers back on. The windshield wipers fail completely. The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning. Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X Z Lights and windshield wipers Problems with the windshield wipers 116 117 Climate control Useful information ............................ 118 Overview of climate control systems ................................................... 118 Operating the climate control systems ................................................... 123 118 Overview of climate control systems Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. Climate control i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 29). Overview of climate control systems General notes Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise fog up. To prevent the windows from fogging up: Rswitch Rswitch briefly off climate control only briefly on air-recirculation mode only Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidification function Rswitch on the defrost windshield function briefly, if required Climate control regulates the temperature and the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters undesirable substances out of the air. Climate control can only be operated when the engine is running. Optimum operation is only achieved with the side windows and roof closed. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated if the ignition is switched off (see the Digital Operator's Manual, keyword "Residual heat"). i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature (see the Digital Operator's Manual, keyword "Convenience opening"). This will speed up the cooling process and the desired interior temperature will be reached more quickly. i The integrated filter filters out most particles of dust and soot and completely filters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants and odors. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Maintenance Booklet. Overview of climate control systems 119 Canada only : Sets the temperature, left ; Defrosts the windshield = Switches the ZONE function on/off ? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off A Switches the rear window defroster on/off B Sets the temperature, right C Switches air-recirculation mode on/off D Sets the air distribution E Increases the airflow F Reduces the airflow G Activates/deactivates the air conditioning H Sets climate control to automatic Climate control Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control Climate control 120 Overview of climate control systems USA only : Sets the temperature, left ; Defrosts the windshield = Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off ? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off A Switches the rear window defroster on/off B Sets the temperature, right C Switches air-recirculation mode on/off D Sets the air distribution E Increases the airflow F Reduces the airflow G Activates/deactivates the air conditioning H Sets climate control to automatic Overview of climate control systems 121 Canada only : ; = ? A B C D E F G H I J Front control panel Sets the temperature, left Defrosts the windshield Switches the residual heat on or off Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off Switches the rear window defroster on/off Sets the temperature, right Switches the ZONE function on/off Activates/deactivates the air conditioning Sets the air distribution Increases the airflow Reduces the airflow Adjusts the climate mode settings Switches air-recirculation mode on/off Sets climate control to automatic K L M N O Rear control panel Increases the airflow Reduces the airflow Display Reduces the temperature Increases the temperature Climate control Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control Climate control 122 Overview of climate control systems USA only : ; = ? A B C D E F G H I J Front control panel Sets the temperature, left Defrosts the windshield Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off Switches the rear window defroster on/off Sets the temperature, right Switches the ZONE function on/off Activates/deactivates the air conditioning Sets the air distribution Increases the airflow Reduces the airflow Adjusts the climate mode settings Switches air-recirculation mode on/off Sets climate control to automatic K L M N O Rear control panel Increases the airflow Reduces the airflow Display Reduces the temperature Increases the temperature Operating the climate control systems 123 Operating the climate control systems In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: the air conditioning RSwitching cooling with air dehumidification on/off RSetting climate control to automatic RAdjusting the climate mode settings RSetting the temperature RSetting the air distribution RSetting the airflow RSwitching the ZONE function on/off RDefrosting the windshield RMAX COOL maximum cooling RDefrosting the windows RSwitching the rear window defroster on/off RSwitching air-recirculation mode on/off RSwitching the residual heat on or off RSetting the air vents Climate control RActivating/deactivating 124 125 Useful information ............................ 126 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ....................................................... 126 Automatic transmission ................... 131 Refueling ............................................ 135 Parking ............................................... 137 Driving tips ........................................ 139 Driving systems ................................ 141 Driving and parking Driving ............................................... 126 126 Driving Driving and parking Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 29). Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle Important safety notes The sensor system of some driving and driving safety systems adjusts automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in procedure. New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake the vehicle. RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown). Additional breaking-in notes Mercedes-AMG vehicles: RDo not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km). ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly. RChange gear in good time. After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed. You should also observe these notes on breaking in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced. Always observe the respective maximum permissible speed. Self-locking rear axle differential (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking differential on the rear axle. Change the oil to improve protection of the rear axle differential: Rafter The first 1000 miles (1500 km) The more you look after the engine when it is new, the more satisfied you will be with its performance in the future. RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicle and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles (1500 km). RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle, during this period. RChange gear in good time, before the tachometer needle is Ô of the way to the red area of the tachometer. a breaking-in period of 1,850 miles (3,000 km) Revery 31,000 miles (50,000 km) or 3 years These oil changes prolong the service life of the differential. Have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Driving Important safety notes G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another. G WARNING Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: Rshoes with thick soles with high heels Rslippers There is a risk of an accident. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals. Only shift the automatic transmission to the desired drive position when the vehicle is stationary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. You could otherwise damage the drive train. ! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low engine oil temperatures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the maximum engine speed is restricted in order to protect the engine. To protect the engine and maintain smooth engine operation, avoid driving at full throttle when the engine is cold. Rshoes G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. G WARNING If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can: Roverheat and cause a fire Rlose its hold function. There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off. ! Do not warm up the engine with the vehicle stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature. SmartKey positions SmartKey g To remove the SmartKey 1 Power supply for some consumers, such as the windshield wipers 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position 3 To start the engine i The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on. The engine cannot be started. Z 127 Driving and parking Driving 128 Driving Driving and parking KEYLESS-GO General notes Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with SmartKeys featuring the integrated KEYLESSGO function and a detachable Start/Stop button. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. When you insert the Start/Stop button into the ignition lock, the system needs approximately two seconds recognition time. You can then use the Start/Stop button. Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different key positions in the ignition lock. This is only the case if you are not depressing the brake pedal. If you depress the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately. A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when starting the engine. To start the vehicle without actively using the SmartKey: Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock. Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle. Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 87). Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey. Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil. Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case. This can affect the functionality of KEYLESSGO. If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey's remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time: Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition with the Start/Stop button. Ryou will not be able to start the engine with the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is unlocked again. The engine can be switched off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function. Key positions with KEYLESS-GO : Start/Stop button ; Ignition lock As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. Further information on situations where an indicator lamp either fails to go out after starting the engine or lights up while driving (Y page 188). If Start/Stop button : has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the key being removed from the ignition. Driving Rthe driver's door is opened and Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when X in this position To switch on the ignition: press Start/ Stop button : twice. The ignition is switched on. If you press Start/Stop button : once when in this position, the ignition is switched off again. Removing the Start/Stop button You can remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal using the SmartKey. It is only possible to switch between Start/ Stop button mode and SmartKey operation when the transmission is in position P. Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition lock ;. You do not have to remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. You should, however, always take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. As long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle: X Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/ Stop button Rthe electrically powered equipment can be operated Starting the engine Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. Rshifting G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. G WARNING Flammable materials introduced through environmental influence or by animals can ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk of fire. Carry out regular checks to make sure that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or in the exhaust system. ! Do not depress the accelerator when starting the engine. Z Driving and parking To switch on the power supply: press Start/Stop button : once. The power supply is switched on. You can now activate the windshield wipers, for example. The power supply is switched off again if: X 129 Driving 130 Driving and parking General notes i The catalytic converter is preheated for up to 30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of the engine may change during this time. Automatic transmission X Shift the transmission to position P. The transmission position display in the multifunction display shows P. i You can start the engine in transmission position P and N. Starting procedure with the SmartKey i To start the engine using the SmartKey instead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/ Stop button out of the ignition lock. X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition lock and release it as soon as the engine is running (Y page 127). Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine i The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle manually without inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. This mode for starting the engine operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine start function. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Press the Start/Stop button once (Y page 128). The engine starts. Pulling away General notes G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. ! If a warning tone sounds and the Release Park. Brake message appears in the multifunction display, the parking brake is still applied. Release the parking brake. Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling away. The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 174). It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. If the brake pedal is not depressed, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the parking lock remains engaged. i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly. Hill start assist Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal Automatic transmission and to depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. 131 General notes After a short time, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist. Hill start assist is not active if: Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a downhill gradient. transmission is in position N. Rthe parking brake is applied. RESP® is malfunctioning. Rthe ECO start/stop function Introduction The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped under certain conditions. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle. Important safety notes G WARNING If the engine is switched off automatically and you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. There is a risk of accident and injury. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the ignition and secure the vehicle against rolling away. : ECO start/stop display The ECO start/stop function is activated whenever you start the engine using the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button. If the engine has been switched off automatically by the ECO start/stop function, the ¤ symbol is shown in the multifunction display. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the AMG menu in the multifunction display additionally shows the Stop/Start active message. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the ECO start/ stop function is only available in drive program C. Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RAutomatic engine switch-off engine start RDeactivating or activating the ECO start/ stop function RAutomatic Problems with the engine You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Automatic transmission Important safety notes G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, Z Driving and parking G WARNING Driving and parking 132 Automatic transmission the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. Selector lever (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Overview of transmission positions DIRECT SELECT lever Overview of transmission positions j k i h Park position with parking lock Reverse gear Neutral Drive The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the steering column. The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current transmission position P, R, N or D appears in the transmission position display in the multifunction display. You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: j k i h Park position with parking lock Reverse gear Neutral Drive Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RTransmission position and drive program display REngaging park position P RTransmission position and drive program display REngaging park position P REngaging park position P automatically REngaging reverse gear R REngaging drive position D Automatic transmission G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. Rshifting If the transmission is in position D or R: push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. X If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. X If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. With the SmartKey: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door or remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically. With KEYLESS-GO: if you then open the driver's or front-passenger door, the automatic transmission shifts to P. If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system: Using the SmartKey: Switch on the ignition. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. X X Using KEYLESS-GO: Remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X Switch on the ignition. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. X Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RTransmission positions tips RProgram selector button RSteering wheel paddle shifters RAutomatic drive program RProblems with the transmission RDriving Manual drive program (MercedesAMG vehicles and vehicles with the AMG sports package) General information In this drive program, you can permanently change gear yourself by using the steering Z Driving and parking Shifting to neutral N 133 Automatic transmission 134 Driving and parking wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must be in position D. the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage. i In addition to permanent drive program M, you can also activate temporary drive program M; see the Digital Operator's Manual. Switching on the manual drive program Press the program selector button until M appears in the multifunction display; see the Digital Operator's Manual. X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: turn the drive program selector until M appears in the multifunction display; see the Digital Operator's Manual. The indicator M on the drive program selector lights up in red. : Gear indicator ; Upshift indicator Manual drive program M is different from drive programs S and S+ with regard to spontaneity, responsiveness and smoothness of gear changes. Manual drive program M can be selected using the drive program selector. In manual drive program M, you can change gear using the steering wheel paddle shifters if the transmission is in position D. The gear currently selected and engaged is shown in the multifunction display. Shift recommendation X Upshifting X Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. Mercedes-AMG vehicles ! In manual drive program M, the automatic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of Before the engine speed reaches the red area, an upshift indicator will be shown in the multifunction display. X When the UP message appears in the multifunction display, pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter. The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction display. X If relevant gearshift recommendation : appears in the multifunction display on the instrument cluster, pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (see the Digital Operator's Manual). The automatic transmission shifts to recommended gear ;. Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: Refueling RSwitching off the manual drive program Refueling Important safety notes G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling. G WARNING Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel. G WARNING Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and explosion. Always touch the vehicle body before opening the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is thereby discharged. ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system. ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. ! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can. Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection system could be blocked by particles from the fuel can. Do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again. If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed. Refueling General information Pay attention to the important safety notes (Y page 135). The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked automatically when you unlock or lock the vehicle with the key or using KEYLESS-GO. The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed 8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle. Z Driving and parking RDownshifting RKickdown 135 Refueling 136 Opening the fuel filler flap Closing the fuel filler flap Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly. X Close the fuel filler flap. Driving and parking X Opening the fuel filler flap (example: CLS Coupe) : To open the fuel filler flap ; To insert the fuel filler cap = Tire pressure table ? Instruction label for fuel type to be refu- Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle. Otherwise, the locking pin of the central locking prevents the fuel filler flap from closing. If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A message appears in the multifunction display (Y page 175). Fuel filler flap emergency release eled Switch off the engine. Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or, on vehicles with KEYLESS GO: X Open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. X Remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 128). X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow :. The fuel filler flap opens slightly. X Open the fuel filler flap fully. X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and remove it. X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the inside of fuel filler flap ;. X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. X X Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out. CLS Coupe: open the trunk lid. Slide down the parcel net. X Open the right-hand side trim panel. X Detach the emergency release from retainer :. X Pull the emergency release in the direction of arrow ;. The fuel filler flap is unlocked. X Open the fuel filler flap. X X Parking 137 Problems with fuel and the fuel tank Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. G WARNING The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. Risk of explosion or fire. X Apply the electric parking brake. X Switch off the engine. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or, on vehicles with KEYLESS GO: X Open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Important safety notes G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire. Park the vehicle so that no flammable materials come into contact with parts of the vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not to park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields. G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Rshift ! Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its drivetrain could be damaged. Z Driving and parking This section provides descriptions of and solutions to safety-relevant problems. Descriptions of and solutions to further problems can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. 138 Parking Driving and parking To ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away unintentionally: Rthe G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rthe Rrelease parking brake must be applied. transmission must be in position P and the SmartKey must be removed from the ignition lock. Rthe front wheels must be turned towards the curb on steep uphill or downhill gradients. Switching off the engine Important safety notes the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Rshift G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. Information in the Digital Operator's Manual A description of how to switch off the engine can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Parking brake G WARNING If you must brake the vehicle with the parking brake, the braking distance is considerably longer and the wheels could lock. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Only use the parking brake to brake the vehicle when the service brake is faulty. Do not apply the parking brake too firmly. If the wheels lock, release the parking brake until the wheels begin turning again. If you brake the vehicle with the parking brake, the brake lamps will not light up. X To apply: depress parking brake ; firmly. When the engine is running, the $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. X To release: depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Pull release handle :. When the ignition is switched on or the engine is running, the $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) indicator lamp goes out in the instrument cluster. Parking the vehicle for a long period You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Driving tips General notes Important safety notes G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. G WARNING If you operate mobile communication equipment while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the vehicle is stationary. Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle. If you make a call while driving, always use hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone when the traffic situation permits. If you are unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop before operating the telephone. Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per second. Drive sensibly – save fuel Observe the following tips to save fuel: The tires should always be inflated to the recommended tire pressure. X Remove unnecessary loads. X Remove roof racks when they are not needed. X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds. X X X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking. Have all maintenance work carried out as indicated by the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet or by the service interval display. Fuel consumption also increases when driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly terrain. Drinking and driving G WARNING Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident is greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs. Emission control G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. Certain engine systems are designed to keep the level of poisonous components in exhaust fumes within legal limits. These systems only work at peak efficiency if they are serviced exactly in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. For this reason, only have work on the engine carried out by qualified and authorized MercedesBenz technicians. The engine settings must not be changed under any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific service work must be carried out at Z 139 Driving and parking Driving tips 140 Driving tips Driving and parking regular intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. ECO display You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Brakes Important safety notes G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. Downhill gradients You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Heavy and light loads G WARNING If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, the braking system can overheat. This increases the stopping distance and can even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time. Further information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Wet roads You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Limited braking performance on salttreated roads You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Servicing the brakes You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. AMG high-performance and ceramic brakes You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Driving on wet roads Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RHydroplaning RDriving on flooded roads Winter driving G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury. If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area Driving systems Further information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Driving systems Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for innovative driver assistance and safety systems which enhance comfort and support the driver in critical situations. With these intelligent co-ordinated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a milestone on the path towards autonomous driving. Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces all elements of active and passive safety in one well thought out system – for the safety of the vehicle occupants and that of other road users. Further information on driving safety systems (Y page 70). Cruise Control General notes Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden, you must shift to a lower gear in time. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can store any road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h). Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. Do not use cruise control: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it differs from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. Z Driving and parking around the vehicle are clear of snow. To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into the wind. 141 142 Driving systems Driving and parking Cruise control lever : ; = ? To activate or increase speed To activate or reduce speed To deactivate cruise control To activate at the current speed/last stored speed When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds. Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RActivation conditions RStoring, maintaining and calling up a speed RSetting a speed cruise control RDeactivating DISTRONIC PLUS General notes DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and automatically helps you maintain the distance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detected with the aid of the radar sensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. This is especially important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent a collision without your intervention. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately in order to increase the distance to the vehicle in front or take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. For DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be switched on and operational; see "Radar sensor system" in the index. DISTRONIC PLUS operates in range between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on roads with steep gradients. As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, it can resemble the radar detectors of the responsible authorities. You can refer to the relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if questions are asked about this. i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Important safety notes G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to: Rpeople or animals Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop- ped or parked vehicles and crossing traffic As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Roncoming G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly identify other road users and complex traffic situations. In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rneither give a warning nor intervene Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly There is a risk of an accident. Continue to drive carefully and be ready to brake, in particular when warned to do so by DISTRONIC PLUS. G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration. If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS warns you visually and audibly. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action. ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen Rin towing the vehicle the car wash If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving on a different line. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors is snow or heavy rain Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example, in parking garages If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpectedly accelerate the vehicle to the stored speed. Rthere Z 143 Driving and parking Driving systems 144 Driving systems This speed may: Driving and parking Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane or an exit lane Rbe so high in the right lane that you pass vehicles driving on the left (left-hand drive countries) Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehicles driving on the right (right-hand drive countries) If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. Cruise control lever : To store the current speed or a higher ; = ? A speed To store the current speed or a lower speed To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS To store the current speed or call up the last stored speed To set the specified minimum distance Activating DISTRONIC PLUS Activation conditions In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine must be started. It may take up to two minutes after pulling away before DISTRONIC PLUS is operational. Rthe parking brake must be released. RESP® must be active, but not intervening. RActive Parking Assist must not be activated. transmission must be in position D. Rthe hood must be closed. Rthe driver's door must be closed when you shift from P to D or your seat belt must be fastened. Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors must be closed. Rthe vehicle must not skid. Rthe Activating X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you =, or press it up : or down ?. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. X Press the cruise control lever repeatedly up : or down ? until the desired speed is set. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed. If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, you can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once your vehicle is stationary as well. i If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Override message appears in the multifunction display. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not be maintained. You will be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator pedal. You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is 18 mph (30 km/h). X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you = up : or down ?. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. To activate at the current speed/last stored speed G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it differs from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know the Driving systems Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it is activated, the current speed is stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise speed to the previously stored value. X Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS Pulling away and driving X If you want to pull away with DISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you =. or X Accelerate briefly. Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to the set speed. i The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a different line from another vehicle. The vehicle then brakes automatically. There is a risk of an accident. Be ready to brake at all times. If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. In this way, the distance you have selected is maintained. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed. However, the vehicle is only accelerated up to the speed you have stored. Selecting the drive program DISTRONIC PLUS supports a sporty driving style when you have selected the S or M (AMG vehicles: S, S+ or M) driving program (Y page 133). Acceleration behind the vehicle in front or to the set speed is then noticeably more dynamic. If you have selected the E (AMG vehicles: C) driving program, the vehicle accelerates more gently. This setting is recommended in stop-and-start traffic. Changing lanes If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC PLUS supports you when: Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h) RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the distance to a vehicle in front Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of collision If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small. i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS monitors the left lane on left-hand drive vehicles and the right lane on right-hand drive vehicles. Stopping G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehicle occupant or from outside the vehicle. Z Driving and parking stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. 145 146 Driving systems Driving and parking Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. There is a risk of an accident. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle against rolling away. For further information on deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 146). If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it is stationary. Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the brake. Depending on the specified minimum distance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in front. The specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever. When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to position P if: Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. Ra system malfunction occurs. Rthe power supply is not sufficient. Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RSetting a speed the specified minimum distance RDISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instrument cluster RSetting Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS There are several ways to deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :. or X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. i The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine. i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivated if: Ryou engage the parking brake intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the frontpassenger door or one of the rear doors is open Rthe vehicle is skidding Ryou activate Active Parking Assist If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. RESP® Driving systems General notes Pay particular attention in the following traffic situations: DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles traveling on a different line. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Other vehicles changing lanes Driving and parking Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS RCornering, going into and coming out of a bend RVehicles traveling on a different line ROther vehicles changing lanes RNarrow vehicles RObstructions and stationary vehicles RCrossing vehicles In such situations, brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated. Cornering, going into and coming out of a bend DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short. Narrow vehicles The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late. Vehicles traveling on a different line 147 DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the vehicle in front on the edge of the road, because of its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Z 148 Driving systems Obstructions and stationary vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot Driving and parking General notes DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these. Crossing vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example, could cause your vehicle to pull away unintentionally. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot aids you in keeping the vehicle in the center of the driving lane by means of moderate steering interventions in the speed range from 0 - 125 mph (0 - 200 km/h). It monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of multifunction camera :, at the top of the windshield. At speeds of 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h), Stop&Go Pilot focuses on the vehicle in front, taking into account lane markings, e.g. when following vehicles in a traffic jam. At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h) Steering Assist focuses on detected lane markings (left and right), and only on the vehicle in front if lane markings are missing. If these conditions are not present, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot provide assistance. DISTRONIC PLUS must be active in order for the function to be available. Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for Driving systems Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet) Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rno, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. in a construction area Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road The system is switched to passive and no longer assists you by performing steering interventions if: Ryou actively change lanes switch on the turn signal Rtake your hands off the steering wheel or do not steer for a prolonged period of time Ryou i After you have finished changing lanes, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are automatically active again. DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist does not provide assistance: Ron very sharp corners a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has been detected and displayed Pay attention also to the important safety notes for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 143). The steering interventions are carried out with a limited steering moment. The system requires the driver to keep his hands on the steering wheel and to steer himself. If you do not steer yourself or if you take your hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged period of time, the system will first alert you with a visual warning. A steering wheel symbol appears in the multifunction display. If you have still not started to steer and have not taken hold of the steering wheel after five seconds at the latest, a warning tone also sounds to remind you to take control of the vehicle. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are switched to passive. DISTRONIC PLUS remains active. Rwhen Z Driving and parking braking in good time and for staying in your lane. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot does not detect road and traffic conditions. If you are following a vehicle which is driving towards the edge of the road, your vehicle could come into contact with the curb or other road boundaries. Be particularly aware of other road users, e.g. cyclists, that are directly next to your vehicle. Obstacles such as building site huts on the lane or projecting out into the lane are not detected. An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. after intentionally driving over a lane marking, can be corrected at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot continuously keep your vehicle in lane. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to bring the vehicle back to the lane. In such cases, you must steer the vehicle yourself to ensure that it does not leave the lane. The support provided by the system can be impaired if: 149 Driving and parking 150 Driving systems Activating Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot X Activate the DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot function using the on-board computer (Y page 174). The DTR+: Steering Assistant On message appears in the multifunction display. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are active. Information in the multifunction display HOLD function General notes The HOLD function can assist the driver in the following situations: Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes Rwhen waiting in traffic The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD function deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. Important safety notes If Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activated but not ready for a steering intervention, steering wheel symbol : appears in gray. If the system provides you with support by means of steering interventions, symbol : is shown in green. Deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot X Deactivate the DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot function using the on-board computer (Y page 174). The DTR+: Steering Assistant Off message appears in the multifunction display. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are deactivated. When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated or not available, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are deactivated automatically. G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away despite being braked by the HOLD function if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected There is a risk of an accident. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the HOLD function and secure the vehicle against rolling away. ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen Rin towing the vehicle the car wash Driving systems You can activate the HOLD function if: Rthe vehicle is stationary engine is running or if it has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is fastened Rthe parking brake is released Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated Rthe Activating the HOLD function When the HOLD function is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to position P if: Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. Rthe hood is opened. Ra system malfunction occurs. Rthe power supply is not sufficient. RACE START Important safety notes Make sure that the activation conditions are met. X Depress the brake pedal. X Quickly depress the brake pedal further until ë : appears in the multifunction display. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal. X i If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again. Deactivating the HOLD function The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if: Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in position D or R. Ryou shift the transmission to position P. Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a certain amount of pressure until ë disappears from the multifunction display. Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS. i Observe the safety notes for the SPORT handling mode (Y page 77). RACE START is intended solely for activation on dedicated race circuits. RACE START enables optimal acceleration from a standing start. The precondition for this is a suitable high-grip road surface. i RACE START is only available in AMG vehicles. Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RConditions RActivating for activation RACE START AIRMATIC Vehicle level Important safety notes G WARNING When the vehicle is being lowered, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the wheels or Z Driving and parking Activation conditions 151 Driving and parking 152 Driving systems underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of injury. Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered. Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Setting raised level G WARNING Vehicles with level control: The vehicle is slightly lowered if: Ryou have selected comfort suspension tun- ing and lock the vehicle within approximately 60 seconds of switching off the engine You and people in the vicinity of the wheel arch or the underbody may thus become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arch or the underbody when you lock the vehicle. Ryou ! The vehicle is lowered by about 15 mm if: Ryou have selected "Comfort tuning" Ryou switch off the engine and then Ryou lock the vehicle within approximately 60 seconds When parking, position your vehicle so that it does not make contact with the curb as the vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could otherwise be damaged. If you unlock the vehicle within 60 seconds of having switched the engine off, the vehicle is lowered slightly when Comfort suspension mode is selected. Your vehicle regulates its height automatically. All-round level control ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. Further general information on the vehicle level can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Setting the vehicle level Select the "Normal" setting for normal road surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow chains or on particularly poor road surfaces. X Start the engine. If indicator lamp ; is not lit: X Press the : button. Indicator lamp ; lights up. The vehicle height is adjusted to raised level. The Vehicle Rising message appears in the display. The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you: Rdrive at a speed over approximately 75 mph (120 km/h) for approximately three minutes at a speed over 50 mph (80 km/h). The "Raised level" remains active when you are not driving within these speed ranges. Rdrive Setting the normal level X Start the engine. If indicator lamp ; is lit: X Press button : . Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to normal level. Suspension tuning General notes You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Driving systems Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RVehicle level RRear axle level control RSuspension tuning Important safety notes G WARNING When the vehicle is being lowered, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the wheels or underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of injury. Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered. G WARNING Vehicles with level control: The vehicle is slightly lowered if: Ryou have selected comfort suspension tun- ing and lock the vehicle within approximately 60 seconds of switching off the engine You and people in the vicinity of the wheel arch or the underbody may thus become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arch or the underbody when you lock the vehicle. Ryou ! The vehicle is lowered by about 0.8 in (20 mm) if: Ryou have selected "Comfortable tuning" switch off the engine and then Ryou lock the vehicle within approximately 60 seconds Ryou When parking, position your vehicle so that it does not make contact with the curb as the vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could otherwise be damaged. Vehicle level Important safety notes G WARNING When the vehicle is being lowered, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the wheels or underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of injury. Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered. The vehicle may be lowered if you press the suspension setting selector button or the AMG button. The vehicle also lowers if it is stationary. ! If Sport or Sport + suspension tuning has been selected, the vehicle's ground clearance decreases. Make sure that no objects become trapped or that the vehicle does not become damaged, for example, on the curb. i The vehicle level may change visibly at the rear axle if you park the vehicle and the outside temperature changes. If the temperature drops, the vehicle level lowers; with an increase in temperature, the vehicle level rises. 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. Z Driving and parking AMG adaptive sport suspension system 153 154 Driving systems If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip: ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. less when driving. Driving and parking RAccelerate ! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. This may damage the transfer case. Damage of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels must remain either on the ground or be fully raised. Observe the instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full contact with the ground. i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary. 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are permanently driven. Together with ESP®, it improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip. PARKTRONIC Important safety notes PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and six sensors in the rear bumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. When maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a parking space, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering. ! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. The sensors may not detect snow and other objects that absorb ultrasonic waves. Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a truck or a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction. PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain. PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you: Rswitch on the ignition the transmission to position D, R or N Rrelease the parking brake PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds. Rshift Range of the sensors General notes PARKTRONIC does not take objects into consideration that are: Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani- mals or objects. the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps. Rabove : Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side (example) The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush. They can otherwise not function cor- Driving systems Range Minimum distance Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm) Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm) If there is an obstacle within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown. Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RWarning displays RDeactivating/activating PARKTRONIC RProblems with PARKTRONIC Active Parking Assist General notes Front sensors Center Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm) Corners Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm) Rear sensors Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates a suitable parking space. Active steering intervention and brake application can assist you during parking. You may also use PARKTRONIC (Y page 154). Important safety notes Center Approx. 48 in (approx. 120 cm) Corners Approx. 32 in (approx. 80 cm) Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects are in the maneuvering range. When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable. Z Driving and parking rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (Y page 243). 155 156 Driving systems G WARNING If there are objects above the detection range: RActive Park Assist may steer too early vehicle may not stop in front of these objects You may cause a collision as a result. There is a risk of an accident. If objects are located above the detection range, stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist. Driving and parking Rthe G WARNING While parking or pulling out of a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could result in a collision with another road user. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to other road users. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Parking Assist parking procedure. ! If unavoidable, you should drive over obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tires. Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate parking spaces which are not suitable for parking, for example: Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits Ron unsuitable surfaces Parking tips: ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the park- ing space as possible. spaces that are littered or overgrown might be identified or measured incorrectly. RParking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. RParking RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC (Y page 155) warning messages during the parking procedure. RYou can intervene in the steering procedure to correct it at any time. Active Parking Assist will then be canceled. RWhen transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist. RNever use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are installed. RMake sure that the tire pressures are always correct. This has a direct influence on the parking characteristics of the vehicle. Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces: Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of travel are on straight roads, not bends Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g. not on the sidewalk. Rthat Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RDetecting parking spaces RParking RExiting a parking space Active Parking Assist RCanceling Driving systems General notes Example: CLS Coupe Rear view camera : is an optical parking and maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind your vehicle with guidelines in the Audio 20 or COMAND display. The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the rear view mirror. i The text shown in the Audio 20 or COMAND display depends on the language setting. The following are examples of rear view camera messages in the COMAND display. Important safety notes The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneuvering or parking, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering. Under the following circumstances, the rear view camera will not function, or will function in a limited manner: Rif the trunk lid or tailgate is open heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rin Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed. Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 243) Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop The field of vision and other functions of the rear view camera may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle rack). On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis, leaving the standard height can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines, depending on technical conditions. i The rear view camera is protected from raindrops and dust by means of a flap. When the rear view camera is activated, this flap opens. The flap closes again when: Ryou have finished the maneuvering proc- ess Ryou switch off the engine open the trunk Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 243). For technical reasons, the flap may remain open briefly after the rear view camera has been deactivated. Ryou ! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe rear section of an HGV Ra slanted post Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline. Rthe Z Driving and parking Rear view camera 157 Driving systems 158 Driving and parking The rear view camera may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The rear view camera does not show objects in the following positions: Rvery close to the rear bumper the rear bumper Rin the area immediately above the tailgate handle Runder Activating/deactivating the rear view camera To activate: make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the Activation by R gear function is selected in Audio 20 or COMAND, see the Digital Operator's Manual. X Engage reverse gear. The rear view camera flap opens. The area behind the vehicle is shown with guide lines in the Audio 20 or COMAND display. The image from the rear view camera is available throughout the maneuvering process. X To deactivate: the rear view camera deactivates if you shift the transmission to P or after driving forwards a short distance. Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RMessages in the Audio 20 or COMAND dis- play R"Reverse parking" function function RWide-angle The system analyzes images from the following cameras: RRear view camera camera RTwo cameras in the exterior rear view mirrors The cameras capture the immediate surroundings of the vehicle. The system supports you, e.g. when parking or if vision is restricted at an exit. You can show pictures from the 360° camera in full-screen mode or in six different splitscreen views on the COMAND/Audio 20 display. A split-screen view also includes a top view of the vehicle. This view is calculated from the data supplied by the installed cameras (virtual camera). The six split-screen views are: Rtop view and picture from the rear view camera (130° viewing angle) Rtop view and image from the front camera (130° viewing angle without displaying the maximum steering wheel angle) Rtop view and enlarged rear view Rtop view and enlarged front view Rtop view and images from the rear-facing side cameras (rear wheel view) Rtop view and images from the forwardfacing side cameras (front wheel view) When the function is active and you shift the transmission from D or R to N, the dynamic guidelines are hidden. When you change between transmission positions D and R, you see the previously selected front or rear view. Distances measured by PARKTRONIC will also be optically displayed: RFront Rin 360° camera General notes The 360° camera is a system that consists of four cameras. split screen view as red or yellow brackets around the vehicle icon in the top view, or Rat the bottom right as red or yellow brackets around the vehicle symbol in full-screen mode The line thickness and color of the brackets show how far the vehicle is from an object. Ryellow brackets with thin lines: PARKTRONIC is active Ryellow brackets with normal lines: an object is present in close range of the vehicle Rred line: an object is present in the immediate close range of the vehicle Important safety notes The 360°camera is only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The 360°camera is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneuvering or parking, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering. You are always responsible for safety, and must always pay attention to your surroundings when parking and maneuvering. This applies to the areas behind, in front of and beside the vehicle. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. The 360° camera will not function or will function in a limited manner: the doors are open the exterior mirrors are folded in Rif the trunk lid/tailgate is open Rin heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the cameras are exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter Rif the camera lenses are dirty or covered Rif the vehicle components in which the cameras are installed are damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Do not use the 360° camera in this case. You can otherwise injure others or cause damage to objects or the vehicle. Guide lines are always shown at road level. On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis, depending on technical conditions, leaving the standard height can result in: Rinaccuracies in the guide lines in the display of generated images (top view) Rinaccuracies Activation conditions The 360° camera image can be displayed if: Ryour vehicle is equipped with a 360° camera Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock RCOMAND/Audio 20 is switched on Rthe 360° Camera function is switched on Switching on the 360° camera X Rif Rif Press the Ø button in the center console for longer than two seconds. Depending on whether position D or R is engaged, the following is shown: Ra split screen with top view and the image from the front camera or Ra split screen with top view and the image from the rear view camera or Press the Ø button in the center console. The vehicle menu is displayed. X Select 360° Camera and press 7 to confirm. Depending on whether position D or R is engaged, the following is shown: Ra split screen with top view and the image from the front camera or Ra split screen with top view and the image from the rear view camera X Z 159 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems 160 Driving and parking Activating the 360° camera using reverse gear The 360° camera images can be automatically displayed by engaging reverse gear. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the Activation by R gear function is selected in COMAND Online/Audio 20 (see the separate COMAND Online/Audio 20 operating instructions). X To show the 360° camera image: engage reverse gear. The area behind the vehicle is shown in the COMAND/Audio 20 display in split-screen mode. You see the top view of the vehicle and the image from the rear view camera. Selecting the split-screen and full screen displays Switching between split screen views To switch to the line with the vehicle icons: slide 5 the controller. X To select one of the vehicle icons: turn 3 the controller. X X To switch to 180° View: turn 3 the controller to select 180° View and press 7 to confirm. i The 180° View option is only available in the following views: Rtop view with picture from the rear view camera Rtop view with picture from the front camera Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RDisplays in the COMAND/Audio 20 display RWide-angle RObject function detection Exiting 360° camera display mode The 360° camera display is stopped Rwhen you select transmission position P, or Rwhen you are driving at moderate speeds The previous display appears on the COMAND/Audio 20 display. You can also switch the display by selecting the & symbol in the display and pressing 7 the controller to confirm. ATTENTION ASSIST General notes ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph (200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. Important safety notes ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It might not always recognize fatigue or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them at all. The system is not a substitute for a wellrested and attentive driver. The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all: Rif the length of the journey is less than approximately 30 minutes Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes Rif there is a strong side wind Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration Rif you are predominantly driving at a speed below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph (200 km/h) Driving systems Steering Assist activated Rif the time has been set incorrectly Rin active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed The attention level evaluation is deleted and restarts when the journey is continued, if: Ryou switch off the engine Ryou take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break Displaying the attention level You can have current status information displayed in the assistance menu (Y page 174) of the on-board computer. X Select the Assistance display for ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 174). The following information is displayed: Rlength of the journey since the last break. attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST, displayed in a bar display in five levels from high to low. Rif ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot output a warning, the System Suspended message appears. The bar display then changes the display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph (200 km/h). Rthe Activating ATTENTION ASSIST X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the onboard computer (Y page 174). The system determines the attention level of the driver depending on the setting selected: Standard selected: the sensitivity with which the system determines the attention level is set to normal. Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is set higher. The attention level detected by Attention Assist is adapted accordingly and the driver is warned earlier. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the À symbol and OFF appear in the multifunction display in the assistance display when the engine is running. When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated, it is automatically reactivated after the engine has been stopped. The sensitivity selected corresponds to the last selection activated (standard/sensitive). Warning in the multifunction display If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration are detected, a warning appears in the multifunction display: Attention Assist: Take a Break! In addition to the message shown in the multifunction display, you will then hear a warning tone. X If necessary, take a break. X Confirm the message by pressing the a button on the steering wheel. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest. If you do not take a break, you will be warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest. This will only happen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration. Vehicles with COMAND: if a warning is issued in the multifunction display, a service station search is performed in COMAND. You Z Driving and parking Rif you are driving with the DISTRONIC PLUS 161 162 Driving systems Driving and parking can select a service station and navigation to this service station will then begin. This function can be activated and deactivated in COMAND. Traffic Sign Assist General notes Traffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speed permitted to the driver in the instrument cluster. The data stored in the navigation system and general traffic regulations are used to determine the current speed limit. As Traffic Sign Assist is a map-based system, traffic signs put up temporarily (e.g. near roadworks) are not detected. If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle is passed, the display of the speed limits is updated. Traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. in wet conditions) are also shown. The traffic signs are only displayed with the restrictions if: regulation must be observed with the restriction, or RTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determine whether the restriction applies If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine a maximum permitted speed from any of the available sources, no speed limit is displayed in the instrument cluster either. Important safety notes Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is not always able to correctly display speed limits. Traffic signs always have priority over the Traffic Sign Assist display. The system may be either functionally impaired or temporarily unavailable if the information in the digital street map of the navigation system is incorrect or out of date. Instrument cluster display Displaying the assistance graphic Call up the assistance graphics display function using the on-board computer (Y page 174). X Select the Traffic Sign Assist display. Detected traffic signs are displayed in the instrument cluster. X Speed limit with unknown restriction Rthe Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries. In this case, symbol : is shown in the assistance graphic display (Y page 174). : Maximum permitted speed ; Maximum permitted speed for vehicles for which the restriction in the additional sign is relevant = Additional sign for unknown restriction A maximum permitted speed of 100 mph (100 km/h) and a speed limit of 80 km/h (80 mph) apply with an unknown restriction. Speed limits in wet conditions : Maximum permitted speed ; Additional signs for wet conditions A maximum permitted speed of 80 mph (80 km/h) applies in wet conditions and if Traffic Sign Assist has determined that the restriction must be observed. Canceling the speed limit The speed limit no longer applies :. i The unit for the speed limit (km/h or mph) depends on the country in which you are driving. It is generally neither shown on the traffic sign nor on the instrument cluster but must be taken into account when observing the maximum permitted speed. Lane Tracking package General notes The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind Spot Assist (Y page 163) and Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 165). Blind Spot Assist General notes Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system to monitor the areas on both sides of your vehicle. It supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lanes, you will also receive an optical and audible collision warning. Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in the rear bumper for monitoring purposes. Important safety notes G WARNING Blind Spot Assist does not react to: Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area Rvehicles which approach with a large speed differential and overtake your vehicle As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always observe the traffic conditions carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance. Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for attentive driving. Always ensure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other road users and obstacles. i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removing, tampering with, or altering the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Monitoring range of the sensors In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain, snow or spray Z 163 Driving and parking Driving systems 164 Driving systems Driving and parking Rthere are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or bicycles Rthe road has very wide lanes Rthe road has narrow lanes Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work properly. Indicator and warning display : Indicator lamp (yellow) Warning lamp (red) If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles driving at the inner edge of their lanes. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv- ing close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an extended period next to long vehicles, such as trucks. The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are integrated into the sides of the rear bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors. The sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational. If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h). The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot Assist is no longer active. The brightness of the indicator or warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light. Driving systems RCollision warning RSwitching on Blind Spot Assist Lane Keeping Assist General notes Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle with camera :, which is mounted at the top of the windshield. Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. This function is available in the range between 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h). A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. Important safety notes G WARNING Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly recognize lane markings. In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may: Rgive an unnecessary warning give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Rnot Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and stay in lane, in particular if warned by Lane Keeping Assist. G WARNING The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not return the vehicle to the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. You should always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keeping Assist. If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehicle in the lane. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface is wet) Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Z Driving and parking Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you can find information about: 165 166 Driving systems Rthe road is narrow and winding are strong shadows cast on the road Driving and parking Rthere Switching on Lane Keeping Assist You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Active Driving Assistance package General notes The Active Driving Assistance package consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 142), Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 166) and Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 168). Active Blind Spot Assist General notes Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system, pointed toward the rear of the vehicle, to monitor the area to the sides of the vehicle which the driver is unable to see. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lanes, you will also receive a visual and audible collision warning. If a risk of lateral collision is detected, corrective braking may help you avoid a collision. Before a course-correcting brake application, Active Blind Spot Assist evaluates the space in the direction of travel and at the sides of the vehicle. For this, Active Blind Spot Assist uses the forward-facing radar sensors. Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Important safety notes Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is not a substitute for attentive driving. G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to: Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area Rvehicles which approach with a large speed differential and overtake your vehicle As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always observe the traffic conditions carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance. i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removing, tampering with, or altering the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Radar sensors The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are integrated into the front and rear bumpers and behind a cover in the radiator trim. Make sure that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rear sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging cargo. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may otherwise no longer work properly. Monitoring area G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all traffic situations and road users. There is a risk of an accident. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance on the side for other traffic or obstacles. be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles at the edge of their lane. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv- ing close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an extended period next to long vehicles, such as trucks. Warning display : Warning display The detection of obstacles can be impaired in the case of: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or spray Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated or indicated with a delay. Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or may only detect them too late. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may Rpoor Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and Active Blind Spot Assist is operational. If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is always given when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h). Z 167 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving and parking 168 Driving systems The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational. The brightness of the warning lamps is automatically adapted to the brightness of the surroundings. Visual and acoustic collision warning If you switch on the turn signals to change lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring range, you receive a visual and acoustic collision warning. You then hear a double warning tone and red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. Course-correcting brake application If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lateral collision in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a collision. G WARNING A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting brake application. Always maintain a safe distance at the sides. In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. An inappropriate course-correcting brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate, for example. The course-correcting brake application is available in the speed range between 20 mph (30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). Either no braking application, or a coursecorrecting brake application adapted to the driving situation occurs if: Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, located on both sides of your vehicle. Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the side. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds. Ryou clearly brake or accelerate. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake. RESP® is switched off. Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is detected. Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RSwitching on Active Blind Spot Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist General notes If a course-correcting brake application occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the exterior mirror and a dual warning tone sounds. In addition, display ; appears in the multifunction display underlining the danger of a side collision. Driving systems Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take account of road and weather conditions. It may not recognize traffic situations. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuously keep your vehicle in its lane. G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly detect lane markings. In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist can: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then make a course-correcting brake application to the vehicle Rnot give a warning or intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep within the lane, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter- minate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface is wet) Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rthe radar sensors in the front or rear bumpers or the radiator trim are dirty, e.g. obscured by snow Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and broken lane markings are detected, no lane-correcting brake application is made. Warning vibration in the steering wheel A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. Lane-correcting brake application G WARNING A lane-correcting brake application cannot always bring the vehicle back into the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. Z Driving and parking Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of multifunction camera : at the top of the windshield. Various different areas to the front, rear and side of your vehicle are also monitored with the aid of the radar sensor system. Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a lane-correcting application of the brakes can bring the vehicle back into the original lane. This function is available in the range between 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h). For Active Lane Keeping Assist to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be operational 169 170 Driving systems Driving and parking Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns you or makes a lane-correcting brake application. G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist only detects traffic conditions or road users to a limited extent. In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application, e.g. after intentionally driving over a solid lane marking. There is a risk of an accident. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance on the side for other traffic or obstacles. If you leave your lane, under certain circumstances the vehicle will brake briefly on one side. This is meant to assist you in bringing the vehicle back to the original lane. If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, display : appears in the multifunction display. A lane-correcting brake application can be made after driving over a lane marking recognize as being solid or broken. Before this, a warning must be given by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides must be recognized. In the case of a broken lane marking being detected, a lane-correcting brake application can only be made if a vehicle has been detected in the adjacent lane. The following vehicles can have an influence on brake application: oncoming traffic, vehicles that are overtaking and vehicles that are driving parallel to your vehicle. i A further lane-correcting brake application can only occur after your vehicle has returned to the original lane. No lane-correcting brake application occurs if: Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration. Ryou have switched on the turn signals. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. RESP® is switched off. Rthe transmission is not in position D. Ran obstacle has been detected in the lane in which you are driving. Rwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has been detected and displayed. There is a possibility that the Active Lane Keeping Assist could misjudge the given traffic situation. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you: Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction Rswitch on the turn signal Rclearly brake or accelerate A lane-correcting brake application is interrupted automatically if: Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Rlane markings can no longer be recognized. Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RSwitching on Active Lane Keeping Assist Useful information ............................ 172 Important safety notes ..................... 172 Displays and operation ..................... 172 Menus and submenus ...................... 174 Display messages ............................. 175 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ............................ 185 On-board computer and displays 171 On-board computer and displays 172 Displays and operation Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 29). Important safety notes G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. sure your vehicle is operating safely at all times. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. For an overview, see the instrument panel illustration (Y page 35). Displays and operation Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RCoolant temperature display RTachometer RSpeedometer with segments display ROutside temperature display RMultifunction Operating the on-board computer Overview You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. G WARNING If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognize function restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The on-board computer only shows messages or warnings from certain systems in the multifunction display. You should therefore make : Multifunction display ; Right control panel = Left control panel X To activate the on-board computer: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. RVehicles a RConfirms the selection or display You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. Left control panel = ; 9 : RCalls up the menu and menu bar Press briefly: in lists a submenu or function RVehicles with Audio 20: in the Audio menu, selects the previous or next stored station, when the preset list or station list is active, or an audio track RVehicles with COMAND: in the Audio menu, selects the previous or next station, when the preset list or station list is active, or an audio track or video scene RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or telephone number Press and hold: 9 : RScrolls RSelects with Audio 20: in the Audio menu, selects the previous or next station, when the preset list or station list is active, selects an audio track using rapid scrolling, or selects a video scene RVehicles with COMAND: in the Audio menu, selects a preset list or station list in the desired frequency range or an audio track or video scene using rapid scrolling RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open message the Tel (Telephone) menu: switches to the telephone book and starts dialing the selected number RIn % Press briefly: RBack RVehicles with Audio 20: Switches off voice-operated control for navigation (see manufacturer's operating instructions) RVehicles with COMAND: Switches off the Voice Control System (see the separate operating instructions) RHides display messages or calls up the last Trip menu function used RExits the telephone book/redial memory % Press and hold: RCalls up the standard display in the Trip menu Z 173 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation On-board computer and displays 174 Menus and submenus Right control panel ~ RRejects or ends a call the telephone book/redial memory RExits 6 RMakes or accepts a call to the redial memory RSwitches W X RAdjusts the volume 8 RMute ? RVehicles with Audio 20: Switches on voice-operated control for navigation (see manufacturer's operating instructions) RVehicles with COMAND: Switches on the Voice Control System (see the separate operating instructions) Menus and submenus Menu overview Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to call up the menu bar and select a menu. Operating the on-board computer (Y page 172). You can find more information on the individual menus in the Digital Operator's Manual. Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you can call up the following menus: RTrip menu menu (navigation instructions) RAudio menu RTel menu (telephone) RDriveAssist menu (assistance) RServ. menu RSett. menu RAMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) RNavi Display messages Introduction General notes This section describes display messages relevant to safety together with their solutions. A description of other messages and their solutions can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Display messages appear in the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual and may therefore differ from the multifunction display. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Operator's Manual. Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone. When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some highpriority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on the HOLD function (Y page 150) and parking (Y page 137). Hiding display messages X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel. The multifunction display hides the display message. The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied. Message memory The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up the display messages: Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example. X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages. X Press a to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages. X Z 175 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 176 Display messages Safety systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions !÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), BAS (Brake Assist System), the HOLD function, PRE SAFE® and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable. BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, PRE SAFE® PLUS and PRE SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient. Currently Unavail able See Opera tor's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the multifunction display still shows the display message: X X !÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ABS, ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function, PRE SAFE® and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, PRE SAFE® PLUS and PRE SAFE® Brake may also have failed. The $ (USA only) or J (Canada only), ÷, å and ! warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ÷ ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function, PRE SAFE® and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, PRE SAFE® PLUS and PRE SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Inoperative See Operator's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 177 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 178 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions T! ÷ EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function, PRE-SAFE® and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, PRE SAFE® PLUS and PRE SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. Inoperative See Operator's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. $(USA only)J(Canada only) Check Brake Fluid Level There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. G WARNING The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. SRS Malfunction Service Required 6 Front Left Malfunc tion Service RequiredorFront Right Malfunction Service Required 6 Rear Left Malfunc tion Service RequiredorRear Right Malfunction Service Required 6 Left Side Curtain Air Bag Malfunc tion Service RequiredorRight Side Curtain Air Bag Malfunction Service Required G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the additional information on restraint systems (Y page 44). The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 179 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 180 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front Passenger Air Bag Disabled See Operator's Man ual The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are deactivated during the journey, although: Ran adult or Ra person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seat If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is. G WARNING The front-passenger front air bag and front passenger knee bag may not be triggered in the event of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Switch the ignition off. X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: RThe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag (Y page 54) Rthe Front Passenger Air Bag Enabled See Opera tor's Manual or Front Passenger Air Bag Disabled See Operator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Observe the additional information on OCS (Y page 54). Front Passenger Air Bag Enabled See Operator's Man ual The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are enabled during the journey, even though: Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat or Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on the seat. G WARNING The front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag may be triggered unintentionally. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Switch the ignition off. X Open the front-passenger door. X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the frontpassenger seat. X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the weight. The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: RThe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit. When the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag (Y page 54) Rthe Front Passenger Air Bag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Air Bag Disabled See Oper ator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display Z 181 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 182 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Observe the additional information on OCS (Y page 54). Engine Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The coolant is too hot. A warning tone also sounds. Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off G WARNING Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Wait until the engine has cooled down. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †). Tires Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Check Tire Pressure Soon The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes: Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or instal- led new wheels and tires. tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped. Rthe G WARNING Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 247). X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pressure is correct (Y page 271). Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is shown in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Z 183 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 184 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 247). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 272). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. Warning Tire Malfunction The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is shown in the multifunction display. G WARNING Driving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards: Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. could lose control of the vehicle. Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat buildup and possibly a fire. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 247). Ryou Vehicle Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Risk of Rolling Away Vehicle Not in 'P' The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the selector lever is in position R, N or D. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. X Shift the selector lever to position P. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Close the driver's door completely. M The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds. Ð The power steering is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. Power Steering Mal function See Oper ator's Manual G WARNING The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Close the hood. G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster General notes This section describes indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster relevant to safety and solutions. A description of other indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster and their solutions can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Z 185 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 186 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicator and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting the engine or whilst driving. Safety Seat belts Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. After starting the engine, the red seat X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48). belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds. ü The driver's seat belt is not fastened. After starting the X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48). engine, the red seat The warning tone ceases. belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds. ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The red seat belt warn- X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48). ing lamp lights up after The warning lamp goes out. the engine starts, as soon as the driver's or There are objects on the front-passenger seat. the front-passenger X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow door is closed. them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The The red seat belt warn- vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly ing lamp flashes and an been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). intermittent audible X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48). warning sounds. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. Z 187 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 188 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Safety systems Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions $ (USA only) G WARNING J (Canada only) The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking charThe red brake system acteristics may be affected. warning lamp comes on There is a risk of an accident. while the engine is runX Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying ning. A warning tone attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving also sounds. under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. $ (USA only) G WARNING J (Canada only) There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. The red brake system The braking effect may be impaired. warning lamp comes on There is a risk of an accident. while the engine is runX Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying ning. A warning tone attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving also sounds. under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the malfunction. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunction. Therefore, BAS (Brake Assist System), BAS PLUS with CrossTraffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), PRE SAFE®, PRE SAFE® PLUS, PRE SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are also deactivated. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available. Z 189 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 190 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP®, PRE SAFE®, PRE SAFE® PLUS, PRE SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are also unavailable. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. $ (USA only) J (Canada only) ÷å! The red brake warning lamp, the yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps and the yellow ABS warning lamp are lit while the engine is running. ABS and ESP® are not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, EBD, PRE SAFE®, PRE SAFE® PLUS, PRE SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are also unavailable. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of The yellow ESP® warn- skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. ing lamp flashes while Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. the vehicle is in motion. X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary. X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP®. In rare cases (Y page 77) it may be best to deactivate ESP®. Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 76). å ESP® is deactivated. ® The yellow ESP OFF G WARNING warning lamp is lit while ® ® the engine is running. If ESP is switched off, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g. Active Blind Spot Assist. The system does not perform course-correcting brake applications. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Reactivate ESP®. In rare cases (Y page 77) it may be best to deactivate ESP®. Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 76). X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X If ESP® cannot be activated: X Drive on carefully. X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. M Mercedes-AMG vehicles only: The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. SPORT handling mode is activated. G WARNING When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions described in the "Activating/deactivating SPORT handling mode" section (Y page 77). Z 191 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 192 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷å The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, PRE SAFE®, PRE SAFE® PLUS, PRE SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 6 The restraint system is faulty. The red restraint sysG WARNING tem warning lamp is lit while the engine is run- The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be ning. triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Have the restraint system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the additional information on restraint systems (Y page 44). Engine Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low. G WARNING The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 241). X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic. Z 193 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 194 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Driving systems Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions · You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at too high a speed. The red distance warning lamp lights up while X Be prepared to brake immediately. the vehicle is in motion. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to A warning tone also brake or take evasive action. sounds. Observe the additional information on PRE SAFE® Brake (Y page 80). Observe the additional information on the distance warning function of COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 73). Tires Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at The yellow combination least one of the tires. low tire pressure tellG WARNING tale/TPMS malfunction telltale for the TPMS is Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: lit. Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 247). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 272). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. h The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/ malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tire pressure monitor is faulty. G WARNING The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure. There is a risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 195 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 196 197 General notes .................................... 198 Important safety notes ..................... 198 Audio 20/COMAND Function restrictions ........................ 199 Audio 20/COMAND operating system ..................................................... 200 198 Important safety notes General notes The Audio 20/COMAND section in these operating instructions describes the basic operating principles. More information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Audio 20/COMAND Important safety notes G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other networked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If you make any changes to the vehicle electronics, the general operating permit is rendered invalid. G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating Audio 20/COMAND. Audio 20/COMAND calculates the route to the destination without taking account of the following, for example: Rtraffic lights and yield signs Rmerging lanes Rparking or stopping in a no parking/no stopping zone Rother road and traffic rules and regulations Rnarrow bridges Audio 20/COMAND can give incorrect navigation commands if the actual street/traffic situation does not correspond with the digital map's data. Digital maps do not cover all areas nor all routes in an area. For example, a route may have been diverted or the direction of a one-way street may have changed. For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over the system's driving recommendations. Navigation announcements are intended to direct you while driving without diverting your attention from the road and driving. Please always use this feature instead of consulting the map display for directions. Looking at the icons or map display can distract you from traffic conditions and driving, and increase the risk of an accident. Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h) your vehicle covers a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) per second. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that is deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 8 inches (20 cm) and more between the radiator and a Rstop Function restrictions 199 person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and legs.) Function restrictions Audio 20/COMAND For safety reasons, some functions are restricted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion. You will notice this, for example, because either you will not be able to select certain menu items or a message will appear to this effect. Z 200 Audio 20/COMAND operating system Audio 20/COMAND operating system Overview Audio 20/COMAND Components : Display for Audio 20 or COMAND ; Audio 20 or COMAND control panel = Controller and buttons Audio 20 and COMAND consists of: Rthe display control panel with a single drive or DVD changer Rthe controller and buttons Ra slot for an SD card Rtwo connection options for USB or Media Interface in the center console An iPod® is connected via USB cable. Rthe Functions RHD FM radio and HD AM radio/satellite radio RMedia - COMAND media support: audio CD, MP3 CD, DVD video, two connection options for USB or Media Interface (e.g. iPod®), SD card, Bluetooth audio Audio 20 media support: if a single drive is available, audio CD and MP3 CD, two connection options for USB or Media Interface (e.g. iPod®), SD card, Bluetooth audio If the Media Interface is available, an iPod® can be connected directly to the USB. - Music search using all media RSound system You can select from two sound systems: - harman/kardon® Logic7® surround sound system - Bang & Olufsen BeoSound AMG sound system (COMAND) Audio 20/COMAND operating system system Navigation via the hard drive (COMAND) - Navigation via an SD card (if available for Audio 20) - Destination entry, e.g. using keyword search (COMAND) - Realistic 3D map with textured city models - Personal POIs and routes using SD memory card (COMAND) - Navigation functions, e.g. compass display (COMAND) - Dynamic route guidance with traffic reports via SIRIUS satellite radio (COMAND) RCommunication - Messaging functions: text messages, email (COMAND) - Address book (COMAND) - Internet browser (COMAND) - Mercedes-Benz Apps with Google™ Local Search, destination and route download, Facebook, Google Street View™, stock prices, news and much more - Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website - WiFi interface for the connection of a smartphone to COMAND - WiFi hotspot functionality to connect a tablet PC or notebook in order to enable access to the Internet using the customer's mobile phone (COMAND) RSIRIUS Weather (COMAND) - Weather data as an information chart (current forecast, 5-day preview, detailed information) - Weather data on the weather map, e.g. rain radar data, storm characteristics and the track of tropical cyclones (hurricanes, tornadoes) - RVehicle functions Vehicle settings, e.g. fuel consumption - 360° camera - Rear view camera - Seat functions RFavorites button (if available) Fast access to favorites functions using the favorites button on the controller - Display General notes ! Do not use the space in front of the display for storage. Objects placed here could damage the display or impair its function. Avoid any direct contact with the display surface. Pressure on the display surface may result in impairments to the display, which could be irreversible. Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your ability to read the display. The display has an automatic temperaturecontrolled switch-off feature. The brightness is automatically reduced if the temperature is too high. The display may then temporarily switch off completely. Overview The example shows the display in SD memory card mode in COMAND. In the status bar at the top you will see the time and other displays, depending on the settings. Below it you will see the main display field. Z Audio 20/COMAND RNavigation 201 202 Audio 20/COMAND operating system The climate control status display is briefly displayed when you operate the climate control system. Audio 20/COMAND Cleaning instructions ! Do not touch the display. The display has a very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a risk of scratching. If you have to clean the screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent and a soft, lint-free cloth. The display must be switched off and have cooled down before you start cleaning. Clean the display screen, when necessary, with a commercially available microfiber cloth and cleaning agent for TFT or LCD displays. Do not apply pressure to the display surface when cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible damage to the display. Then, dry the surface with a dry microfiber cloth. Avoid using alcoholic thinners, gasoline or abrasive cleaning agents. These could damage the display surface. Audio 20/COMAND operating system 203 Function : Switches to radio mode Calls up the Radio menu ; Switches to the last selected media mode Calls up the Media menu = ? A Inserts/removes a CD/DVD into/from the single drive (COMAND, Audio 20) Inserts a CD/DVD into the DVD changer (COMAND) Removes a CD/DVD from the DVD changer (COMAND) Selects the previous station from the station list Skips backwards to a track Rewinds Inserts/removes a CD/DVD 8 Single drive (Audio 20, COMAND) V DVD changer (COMAND) Page Function 219 219 B Clear button • Deletes characters • Deletes an entry ~ ~ C Selects the next station from the station list Skips forwards to a track Fast forward ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ D Number pad • Saves a station • Mobile phone authorization • Telephone number entry • Searches for a contact • Character entry z Displays the current track being played (if the data medium supports track information) g Selects stations by entering the frequency manually g Selects a track Page 206 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ Z Audio 20/COMAND COMAND control panel 204 Audio 20/COMAND operating system E F Audio 20/COMAND G H Function Page Switches Audio 20 or COMAND on or off Adjusts the volume ~ ~ Inserts or removes an SD memory card ~ Accepts a call Makes a call Redial Accepts a new call when a call is being made (call waiting) Rejects a call Ends an active call Function I 174 216 ~ J K ~ 216 216 L Switches the mute function on/off Switches navigation announcements off (COMAND) Page ~ ~ Switches to navigation mode Calls up the navigation system menu ~ Calls up the telephone menu ~ Calls up vehicle settings ~ 209 Audio 20/COMAND operating system 205 Function : ; = ? A Switches to radio mode Calls up the Radio menu Page 219 219 Switches to the last selected media mode Calls up the Media menu ~ ~ Inserts and removes a CD from the single drive (if single drive available) ~ Selects the previous station from the station list Skips backwards to a track ~ ~ Inserts/removes a CD (if button available) 8 Single drive B Clear button • Deletes characters • Deletes an entry C Selects the next station from the station list Skips forwards to a track Function D ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ E Switches Audio 20 on or off Adjusts the volume ~ ~ F Inserts or removes an SD memory card ~ ~ 206 Number pad • Saves a station • Authorizes (connects) a mobile phone • Telephone number entry • Searches for a contact g Selects stations by entering the frequency manually g Selects a track Page G H Accepts a call Makes a call Redial Accepts a new call when a call is being made (call waiting) 174 216 ~ Rejects a call Ends an active call ~ ~ ~ Z Audio 20/COMAND Audio 20 control panel 206 Audio 20/COMAND operating system Function I Audio 20/COMAND J Switches the mute function on/off Switches off navigation announcements Calls up the sound menu Switches to navigation mode Page K ~ ~ Clear button Switches the display on/off Favorites button (if available) Back button Controller Instead of button ;, the vehicle may be equipped with the seat function button. For Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the controller is equipped with buttons : and ?. Controller The controller in the center console lets you: menu items on the display characters Rselect a destination on the map Rsave entries The controller can be: Renter Rturned 3 left or right 1 Rslid forwards or back 4 Rslid Calls up the telephone menu ~ Calls up vehicle settings ~ ~ Overview Rselect Page ~ Buttons and controller : ; = ? A L Function Rslid diagonally 2 briefly or pressed and held 7 Rpressed Back button You can use the % button to exit a menu or to call up the basic display of the current operating mode. X To exit the menu: briefly press the % button. Audio 20 or COMAND changes to the next higher menu level in the current operating mode. X To call up the basic display: press the % button for longer than two seconds. Audio 20 or COMAND changes to the basic display of the current operating mode. Clear button X To delete individual characters: briefly press the $ button on the control panel. or X Briefly press the j clear button on the controller. X To delete an entire entry: press and hold the $ button on the control panel. or X Press and hold the j clear button on the controller. Favorites button You can assign predefined functions using the g favorites button and call them up by pressing the button. Audio 20/COMAND operating system 207 Favorites Overview of favorites : To add a new favorite (Y page 207) ; To rename a selected favorite (Y page 208) = To move a selected favorite (Y page 208) ? To delete a selected favorite (Y page 208) To display the favorites overview: press the favorites button on the controller. The favorites are displayed. X To show the menu bar: slide 6 the controller. X You can manage a total of 20 favorites. Further information on how to select and display a favorite (Y page 207). Displaying and selecting favorites Press the favorites button on the controller. The favorites are displayed. X To call up a favorite: turn and press the controller. X Adding favorites Adding predefined favorites X Press the favorites button on the controller. The favorites are displayed. X To show the menu bar: slide 6 the controller. X To select Reassign, turn and press the controller. The categories for the available favorites are displayed: RNavigation REntertainment RTel RVehicle X To select a category: turn the controller and press to confirm. The corresponding favorites are displayed. X To select a favorite: turn and press the controller. X To store a favorite in the desired order: turn and press the controller. The favorite has been added. If a favorite is stored over another favorite, this is then deleted. Adding your own favorites You can create your own favorites to help you to use these functions, for example: Rcalling up telephone numbers from the tele- phone book a radio station Rskipping to a specific point in a track or audio book Rcalling up preferred media Rselecting navigation destinations for route calculation You can create your own favorites to help you to use these functions, for example: Rselecting Rcalling up telephone numbers from the tele- phone book a radio station Rselecting Z Audio 20/COMAND Display off button You can switch the display on and off with the _ button. Audio 20/COMAND operating system 208 Audio 20/COMAND Rskipping to a specific point in a track or audio book Rcalling up preferred media The example shows how to save a telephone number from the phone book as a favorite. X To store a phone number as a favorite: press and hold the favorites button on the controller until the favorites are displayed. X To store a favorite in the desired order: turn and press the controller. The favorite is added. If a favorite is stored over another favorite, this is then deleted. Renaming favorites Press the favorites button on the controller. The favorites are displayed. X To select a favorite to be renamed: turn the controller. X To show the menu bar: slide 6 the controller. X To select Rename, turn and press the controller. X To finish the entry: select OK. The favorite is renamed. X Moving favorites To select Move: turn and press the controller. X To store a favorite in the desired order: turn and press the controller. The favorite is moved. If a favorite is stored over another favorite, this is then deleted. X Deleting favorites Press the favorites button on the controller. The favorites are displayed. X To select a favorite to be deleted: turn the controller. X To show the menu bar: slide 6 the controller. X To select Delete: turn and press the controller. X To select Yes or No: turn and press the controller. If you select Yes the favorite is deleted. No cancels the procedure. X Vehicle settings Calling up vehicle settings X Press the Ø button. or Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed. X To select Vehicle Settings: turn and press the controller. The Vehicle Settings menu is active. X To select the desired vehicle setting: turn and press the controller. The main area with the setting element is active. X Press the favorites button on the controller. The favorites are displayed. X To select a favorite to be moved: turn the controller. X To show the menu bar: slide 6 the controller. X Selecting a different vehicle setting: X To activate the menu for selecting the vehicle setting: slide 5 the controller. Exiting the vehicle settings: X To select & in the display: slide 6 and press the controller. Audio 20/COMAND operating system 209 Introduction Important safety notes G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the navigation system. General notes Audio 20 is equipped with MARGIN® MAP PILOT (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Further information on navigation using COMAND can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Among other things, correct functioning of the navigation system depends on GPS reception. In certain situations, GPS reception may be impaired, there may be interference or there may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or parking garages. At vehicle speeds of above 5 km/h, data entries are restricted. i The functionality of a roof antenna (telephone, GPS) may be impaired if roof carriers are used. Showing/hiding the menu X To show: slide 6 the controller when the map appears. X To hide: press the % button. Destination entry General notes The information given relating to destination entry applies to COMAND. For information on Audio 20, see the manufacturer's operating instructions. Destination entry options Destination entry may be blocked while driving, depending on the country specifications. Address input Keyword search using fragments of words From the list of last destinations (up to 50 destinations) Selecting a contact from the address book (contact with navigation data L) Selecting a POI (e.g. gas station, restaurant) for different positions On the map Entering intermediate destinations From Mercedes-Benz Apps Requirement (USA): mbrace is activated for the Mercedes-Benz Apps. Requirement (Canada): a mobile phone is connected via Bluetooth® or USB with COMAND. Entering geo-coordinates Switching to navigation mode X Press the ß button. The map shows the vehicle's current position. Z Audio 20/COMAND Navigation Audio 20/COMAND operating system 210 Audio 20/COMAND Example: address entry Show the menu (Y page 209). To select Destination: turn and press the controller. X Select Address Entry. X Enter the address, e.g. as a city, street and house number. i Audio 20 or COMAND can give incorrect navigation commands if the actual street or traffic situation does not correspond with the digital map's data. Road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over system driving recommendations. X X X To calculate a route: to confirmStart: press the controller. The route is calculated with the current route type. To select a route type: show the menu (Y page 209). X To select Settings: turn and press the controller. X Select Route Settings. X Select a route type. The route type is used for the next route calculation. If Dynamic Traffic Route, Dynamic TRF. Route After Request or Eco Route has been selected, traffic reports on the route are taken into account. i You can map the route to the destination yourself with up to four intermediate stops. X Route guidance Navigation announcements and route guidance displays guide you to your destination. The information given relating to destination entry applies to COMAND. For information on Audio 20, see the manufacturer's operating instructions. Before and during a change of direction, the map is shown on the left side of the display and a view of the intersection or a 3D image on the right. Lane recommendations (white directional arrows) may be shown at the bottom of the display for multilane roads. Navigation announcements To adjust the volume: turn the o control knob during a navigation announcement. X To switch off: during a navigation announcement, press the 8 button on the COMAND control panel. X Route information Show the menu (Y page 209). To select Route: turn and press the controller. X To display destination information: select Destination Information. X To display the route list: select Route List. X To display the current position: select Where am I?. X X Audio 20/COMAND operating system Press the controller. To select Destination: turn and press the controller. X Select Cancel Active Route Guidance or Continue Route Guidance. X X Real-time traffic reports The information given relating to destination entry applies to COMAND. For information on Audio 20, see the manufacturer's operating instructions. In order to receive real-time traffic reports via satellite radio, you need to subscribe to SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio Traffic Message Service. COMAND can receive traffic reports via satellite radio and take account of these for route guidance in the navigation system. Received traffic reports are displayed on the map either as text or as symbols. X To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu: slide 6 the controller. X To select Traffic: turn and press the controller. If satellite signals cannot be received or there are no traffic reports, you will see a message to this effect. X To close the report: press the controller. Map functions General notes The information given relating to destination entry applies to COMAND. For information on Audio 20, see the manufacturer's operating instructions. Setting the map scale Requirement: the map is in full screen mode, the menu is faded out (Y page 209). X Turn the controller until the desired scale is set. Moving the map Requirement: the map is in full screen mode, the menu is faded out (Y page 209). X Slide 1, 4 or 2 the controller. The crosshair is shown. The map moves in the corresponding direction under the crosshair. i Pressing the controller selects a destination in the map. Selecting map orientation Show the menu (Y page 209). X To select Options: turn and press the controller. X Select Map Orientation. The # dot indicates the current setting. X Turn and press the controller. The map orientation is set. X Building images and elevation modeling In small map scales (20 m, 50 m), important buildings are depicted realistically on the map; other buildings are shown as models. Selected cities are realistically depicted using elevation modeling. Calling up the online map display Requirement: a mobile phone with a data package must be connected to COMAND. X Show the menu (Y page 209). X Slide 5 the controller twice. X Press the controller. The navigation menu appears. X Turn the controller until Online Map Dis play is brought to the front. X Press the controller. The online connection is established. Once the connection is established, the Google™ Maps map shows the vicinity of the current vehicle position. Z Audio 20/COMAND Canceling/continuing route guidance 211 Audio 20/COMAND operating system 212 Connecting and disconnecting a mobile phone Prerequisites Audio 20/COMAND For telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, you require a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone. The mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile 1.0 or above. Activating Bluetooth® in Audio 20/ COMAND Press the Ø button in the center console. The Vehicle menu appears. X To select System Settings: slide 6, turn and press the controller to confirm. X To select Activate Bluetooth: turn and press the controller. This switches Bluetooth® on O or off ª. X On the mobile phone Switch on the mobile phone and enter the PIN when prompted to do so (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Bluetooth® visibility for other devices (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). This visibility is for restricted periods of time on some mobile phones (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X Set the Bluetooth® device name for the mobile phone if necessary. X The Bluetooth® device names for all of one manufacturer's products might be identical. To make it possible to clearly identify your mobile phone, change the device name (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). The name can be freely selected. If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message Access Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the following information will be transmitted after you connect: RPhone book lists RMessages The battery of the mobile phone should always be kept sufficiently charged in order to prevent malfunctions. RCall i Not all mobile phones available on the market are equally suitable. You can obtain more detailed information about suitable mobile phones and about the connection between the mobile phone and Audio 20/ COMAND on the Internet at http://www.mbusa-mobile.com. You can also obtain more information by calling. In the USA, you can get in touch with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372). In Canada, you can get in touch with the Customer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100. i Some displays (e.g. the signal strength) depend on the supported version of the Hands-Free Profile. Procedure and general information Searching for and authorizing (connecting) a mobile phone Before using your mobile phone with Audio 20/COMAND for the first time, you will need to search (Y page 213) for the phone and then authorize it (Y page 214). Depending on the mobile phone, authorization either takes place by means of Secure Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. Audio 20/COMAND automatically makes the system suitable for your mobile phone available. You can recognize Secure Simple Pairing by a code which is Audio 20/COMAND operating system 213 Searching for a mobile phone To call up the telephone menu: press the % button. X To switch to the menu bar in the telephone menu: slide 6 the controller. X To select Connect Device: turn the controller and press to confirm. The device list is displayed. X To select Search for Phones: turn and press the controller. A message is displayed that Bluetooth® must be activated on the mobile phone and must be made visible to other devices. X To select Start Search: press the controller. The available mobile phones are displayed in the device list. X The duration of the search depends on the number of Bluetooth® telephones within range and their characteristics. If a new phone is found, it appears in the device list with the Ï symbol. You can now authorize (connect) the mobile phone found (Y page 214). If the device list is already full, you will be requested to de-authorize a mobile phone (Y page 215). When you call up the device list again, deauthorized devices will be removed from the list. To update the device list, start the search again. Symbols in the device list Symbol Explanation Ï New mobile phone found, not yet authorized. Ñ Mobile phone is authorized, but is not connected. # Mobile phone is authorized and connected. Z Audio 20/COMAND displayed in Audio 20/COMAND and on the mobile phone. You can recognize the passkey system by the fact that you have to enter a code on the mobile phone and in Audio 20/ COMAND. The mobile phone is always connected automatically after authorization. If Audio 20/COMAND does not detect your mobile phone, this may be due to particular security settings on your mobile phone. You can also start the search procedure and authorization on the mobile phone (Y page 214). Device-specific information on authorizing and connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile phones can be found on the Internet at http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ connect. You can authorize up to 15 mobile phones. Only one mobile phone can be connected to Audio 20/COMAND at any one time. De-authorizing (disconnecting) a mobile phone The connection is terminated automatically if you leave the receiver range of Audio 20/ COMAND or deactivate Bluetooth® on your mobile phone. If you no longer want the Bluetooth® connection to be established automatically, the mobile phone must be de-authorized (disconnected) (Y page 215). Audio 20/COMAND operating system 214 Audio 20/COMAND Authorizing a mobile phone (connecting) Authorization via Secure Simple Pairing Once Audio 20/COMAND has found your mobile phone, you can authorize (connect) it. X To select a mobile phone from the device list: turn the controller and press to confirm. A code is displayed in Audio 20/COMAND and on the mobile phone. The code is the same Audio 20/COMAND: select Yes. X Mobile phone: confirm the code. Depending on the mobile phone used, you may have to confirm the connection to Audio 20/COMAND as well as confirm for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to two minutes to be displayed. You may also save the confirmation on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). The mobile phone is now authorized and connected to Audio 20/COMAND. You can now speak using the hands-free system. X Further information on setting the transmission and reception volume of the mobile phone can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. The code is different X Audio 20/COMAND: select No. The process is canceled. Repeat the authorization. Authorization via passkey entry (access code) Once Audio 20/COMAND has found your mobile phone, you can authorize (connect) it. X To select the Bluetooth® name of the desired mobile phone in the device list: turn and press the controller. The input menu for the passkey is displayed. The passkey is a one- to sixteen-digit number combination which you can choose yourself. X Audio 20/COMAND: enter the passkey using the character bar. X Select ¬ once all the numbers have been entered. X Mobile phone: enter the same passkey and confirm your entry. Depending on the mobile phone used, you may have to confirm the connection to Audio 20/COMAND as well as confirm for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to two minutes to be displayed. You may also save the confirmation on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). The mobile phone is now authorized and connected to Audio 20/COMAND. You can now speak using the hands-free system. Further information on setting the transmission and reception volume of the mobile phone can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. If the Authorization Failed message appears, you may have entered a different passkey or exceeded the prescribed time limit. Repeat the procedure. i Some mobile phones require a passkey with four or more digits. i If you wish to re-authorize the mobile phone after de-authorizing it, you can choose another passkey for it. Establishing the connection from the mobile phone The Bluetooth® device name of Audio 20/ COMAND is "MB Bluetooth". X Audio 20/COMAND: call up the telephone menu. X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the controller. Audio 20/COMAND operating system 215 The code is the same X X Audio 20/COMAND: select Yes. Mobile phone: confirm the code. Depending on the mobile phone used, you may have to confirm the connection to Audio 20/COMAND as well as confirm for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to two minutes to be displayed. You may also save the confirmation on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). The mobile phone is now authorized and connected to Audio 20/COMAND. You can now speak using the hands-free system. The code is different X Audio 20/COMAND: select No. The process is canceled. Repeat the procedure. If your mobile phone does not support Secure Simple Pairing, you can find more information about connecting the mobile phone in the Digital Operator's Manual. Reconnecting automatically Audio 20/COMAND always searches for the last connected mobile phone. If no connection can be made to the most recently connected mobile phone, the system searches for the mobile phone that was connected before that one. Switching between mobile phones If you have authorized more than one mobile phone, you can switch between the individual phones. X To call up the telephone menu: press the % button. X To show the menu bar: slide 6 the controller. X To select Connect Device: turn the controller and press to confirm. The device list is displayed. X To select the desired mobile phone: turn and press the controller. The selected mobile phone is searched for and connected if it is within Bluetooth® range and if Bluetooth® is activated. Only one mobile phone can be connected at any one time. The currently connected mobile phone is indicated by the # dot in the device list. i You can only switch to another authorized mobile phone if you are not currently making a call. De-authorizing (disconnecting) a mobile phone Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC recommends Deauthorization in Audio 20/COMAND and on the mobile phone. Subsequent authorization may otherwise fail. X To call up the telephone menu: press the % button. X To show the menu bar: slide 6 the controller. Z Audio 20/COMAND To select Connect Device: turn the controller and press to confirm. The device list is displayed. X To select Connect via Phone: turn and press the controller. A message is displayed, stating that you can start the search on your mobile phone. X Mobile phone: start the search for a Bluetooth® device (see manufacturer's operating instructions). Audio 20/COMAND is displayed with the name "MB Bluetooth" in the mobile phone's device list. X Select "MB Bluetooth". A prompt appears in the Audio 20/ COMAND display asking whether the mobile phone should be authorized. X Audio 20/COMAND: select Yes. If No is selected, the procedure is canceled. If your mobile phone supports Secure Simple Pairing, a code is now displayed on both devices. X Audio 20/COMAND operating system 216 To select Connect Device: turn the controller and press to confirm. X To highlight the desired mobile phone in the device list: turn the controller. X To select G: slide 9 the controller. X To select Deauthorize: turn and press the controller. A prompt appears, asking whether you really wish to de-authorize this device. X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. The mobile phone is de-authorized. Audio 20/COMAND X i Before re-authorizing the mobile phone, you should also delete the device name MB Bluetooth from your mobile phone's Bluetooth® list. Rejecting a call X To select Reject: turn the controller and press to confirm. or X Press ~ on the multifunction steering wheel. Ending an active call X To select = in the telephone menu: turn and press the controller. or X Press ~ on the multifunction steering wheel. The active call is ended. Making a call Using the telephone Accepting a call X or X To select Accept: press the controller. Press 6 on the multifunction steering wheel. The call is accepted. Further information on the functions you can use during a call can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. i You can also accept the call by voice command using the Voice Control System (see the separate operating instructions). i If the phone number of the caller is transferred, it appears in the display. If the phone number is saved in the phone book, the contact's name is also displayed. If the phone number is not transferred, Unknownis shown in the display. Using the telephone menu X To call up the telephone menu: press the % button. X To select all numbers one after the other in the telephone menu: turn and press the controller each time. X To select w in the telephone menu: turn and press the controller. The call is made. Using call lists X To call up the telephone menu: press the % button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the controller. X To select Call Lists: turn and press the controller. X To select Calls Received or Calls Dialed: turn and press the controller. The relevant list is displayed. X To select an entry and make a call: turn and press the controller. Audio 20/COMAND operating system 217 If a contact contains more than one phone number: X To select a telephone number: turn and press the controller. Further information on the phone book can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Setting up an Internet connection Procedure and general information USA: to use Mercedes-Benz Apps and Internet access, mbrace must be activated and operational. Furthermore, mbrace must be activated for Mercedes-Benz Apps and Internet access. No further settings are required. Canada: in order to set up a mobile phone for Internet access, your mobile phone must be connected via Bluetooth® to Audio 20/ COMAND. If you are using Internet access for the first time, you must enable the connected mobile phone for Internet access (Y page 217). If the connected mobile phone supports the Bluetooth® PAN profile, you do not need to make additional settings. The Internet connection is established. If the con- nected mobile phone does not support the named Bluetooth® profile, predefined (Y page 218) or manual access data (Y page 218) must be set. Enabling the mobile phone for Internet access To call up the telephone menu: press the % button. X To switch to the main function bar: slide 5 the controller. X To select TEL/®: press the controller. X To select Internet: turn and press the controller. The menu with the Internet functions is displayed. X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the controller. X To select Settings: turn and press the controller. X To select Configure Internet Set tings: turn and press the controller. The device list is displayed. X To select Search for Bluetooth Phone: turn and press the controller. Mobile phones are displayed that: Rare connected with Audio 20/COMAND Rfulfill the conditions for the Internet functions Rhave not yet been set up for the Internet function X Z Audio 20/COMAND Using the phone book X To call up the telephone menu: press the % button. X To select Name in the telephone menu: turn and press the controller. The phone book is displayed with an active character bar. X To select characters: turn the controller and press to confirm. The first contact with the selected first character is highlighted in the phone book. X Select the characters of the contact you are searching for one by one, pressing and confirming with the controller each time. X To end the search: select ¬. The contacts in the phone book are displayed. X To select a contact: turn and press the controller. Audio 20/COMAND operating system 218 Audio 20/COMAND X To select a mobile phone from the device list: turn the controller and press to confirm. If the mobile phone supports the Bluetooth® PAN profile, Internet access is set up. You can use the Internet functions. If the connected mobile phone does not support the named Bluetooth® profile, predefined (Y page 218) or personalized access data (Y page 218) must be set. Setting access data of the mobile phone network provider Selecting the predefined access data of the mobile phone network provider X To select Predefined Settings: turn and press the controller. A list of countries appears. X To select Confirm Settings: turn and press the controller. If the mobile phone network provider provides multiple access data options, the relevant access data still has to be selected. This depends on the data package used, for example. Manually setting the access data of the mobile phone network provider X To select Manual Settings: turn and press the controller. An overview of the provider settings appears. X Set access data (Y page 218). X To confirm settings: select Confirm Set tings and turn and press the controller. The access data for the mobile phone network provider is selected once for the mobile phone connected and is loaded again each time the mobile phone is connected. You must set the access data of the mobile phone network provider who provides the SIM card and the associated data package (access settings) for the connected mobile phone. The access data remains the same when you are in a different country (roaming). The access data of another network is not selected. Setting access data Set the access data in accordance with your data package. You can contact your mobile phone network provider to obtain the precise access data. Explanation of the access data Input field Meaning Phone Num ber: Access number for establishing the connection The access number depends on the mobile phone used. For GSM/ UMTS mobile phones, *99***1# is used as a standard. Access Point: APN network access point (Access Point Name) You can obtain this information from your mobile phone network provider. Entry is not necessary for all mobile phone network providers and mobile phones. PDP Type: Internet protocol used. You can obtain this information from your mobile phone network provider. User ID: The user identification can be obtained from your mobile phone network provider. Entry is not necessary for all mobile phone network providers. Audio 20/COMAND operating system Meaning Password: The password can be obtained from your mobile phone network provider. Entry is not necessary for all mobile phone network providers. Auto DNS: Automatic allocation of DNS servers is activated. If the function is deactivated, the DNS server addresses must be entered manually. DNS (Domain Name Service) DNS1: DNS2: Fields for entering the DNS server addresses manually. The address can be obtained from your mobile phone network provider. Radio mode Arming X Press the $ button. The radio display appears. You will hear the last station played on the last waveband selected. Overview Example COMAND : Main function bar ; Status bar with compass display = Main display field with available stations and relevant information ? Display of radio station selected A Radio menu bar Selecting the main function bar X Slide 5 the controller. Selecting the menu bar X Slide 6 the controller. Menu options In radio mode: slide 6 the controller. The radio menu bar appears. X To select Options: turn and press the controller. The following setting options are available to you: X RTag This Track: saves track information on an Apple® device for a later purchase option via iTunes® REnter Frequency: manual frequency entry RCurrent Station/Channel Listing: list of available stations REdit Station Preset: selects and edits station presets Z Audio 20/COMAND Input field 219 Audio 20/COMAND operating system 220 RShow Station Information: Information switches artist and track display and station name on/off RHD Radio: Radio switches HD Radio on/off Audio 20/COMAND Setting the waveband Using the button: in radio mode press the $ button. X Turn the controller until the required waveband is in the center. Press the controller. or X Using the radio menu bar: in radio mode, slide 6 the controller. X To select Band/Preset Band/Preset: turn and press the controller. X Turn the controller until the required waveband is selected. Press the controller. X Selecting a station RTo select via the main display field: in radio mode, turn the controller until the desired station is in the center. RVia the "Options" menu: using Current Station/Channel Listing or Enter Frequency select or enter the desired station. RUsing the search function (COMAND): in radio mode, select è in the menu bar and enter the first letters of the desired station using the controller. Radio text/radio text plus This function is not available in all countries. X To switch on radio text: in radio mode, select Info in the menu bar. Additional information from the current station is displayed. 221 Useful information ............................ 222 Stowage areas ................................... 222 Stowage and features Features ............................................. 227 222 Stowage areas Useful information Stowage and features i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 29). Stowage areas Loading guidelines G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open. G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. There is a risk of injury. Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow these components to cool down before touching them. The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you should observe the following notes when transporting a load: RNever exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle mass or the gross axle weight rating for the vehicle (including occupants). The values are specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's door. RThe trunk is the preferred place to carry objects. RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as possible and as low down in the trunk as possible. RThe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. RAlways place the load against the rear or front seat backrests. Make sure that the seat backrests are securely locked into place. RAlways place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. RUse the cargo tie-down rings and the parcel nets to transport loads and luggage. RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening materials appropriate for the weight and size of the load. RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges for protection. Stowage spaces Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not correctly store objects in the vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung Stowage areas Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 222). Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RGlove box REyeglasses compartment RStowage compartments in the center console RStowage compartment under the armrest RStowage compartment under the front seats RStowage compartment in the rear seat armrest Rear bench seat through-loading feature Important safety notes G WARNING If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the event of an accident. RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The seat belt can no longer offer the intended level of protection and could even cause injuries. RObjects or loads in the trunk cannot be restrained by the seat backrest. There is an increased risk of injury. Before every trip, make sure that the seat backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 222). The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrests can be folded down separately to increase the trunk capacity. Folding the seat backrest forward Stowage nets Stowage nets are located in the frontpassenger footwell and on the left-hand side of the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 222) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (Y page 222). i Vehicles with memory function: when you fold one or both parts of the rear seat backrest forwards, the respective front seat moves forward slightly, when necessary, in order to avoid contact. Z Stowage and features around, thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly changing directions. RAlways store objects so that they cannot be flung around in these or in similar situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage compartments, parcel nets or stowage nets. RClose lockable stowage compartments while driving. RStow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the trunk. 223 Stowage areas 224 Vehicles without memory function: if necessary, move the driver's or frontpassenger seat forward. X Open the trunk. X Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat backrest release handle :. The corresponding rear seat backrest is released. Stowage and features X tion display in the instrument cluster. A warning tone also sounds. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. i You should always engage the rear seat backrests if you do not need the throughloading feature. This will prevent unauthorized access to the trunk from the vehicle interior. Securing cargo Cargo tie-down rings General notes Observe the following notes on securing loads: Fold rear seat backrest ; forwards. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. X Folding the seat backrest back ! Make sure that the seat belt does not become trapped when folding the rear seat backrest back. Otherwise, it could be damaged. RObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 222). RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down rings. RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down rings evenly. RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads. RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges or corners. RPad sharp edges for protection. Trunk Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. X Fold rear seat backrest : back until it engages. If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown in the multifuncX : Cargo tie-down rings Stowage areas EASY-PACK trunk box 225 Adjusting the height to any position G WARNING When the load surface moves up, your hands may become trapped on the frame of the EASY-PACK trunk box. There is a risk of injury. When the load surface moves up, make sure that your hands are not within the sweep of the load surface. If someone becomes trapped, carefully push the center of the load surface downward. ! When the EASY-PACK trunk box is pulled out, no objects may be placed on the frame of the box, nor should the frame be pushed from above. Otherwise, the box could be damaged. ! Sharp-edged, pointed or fragile objects can damage the EASY-PACK trunk box and then be thrown out. There is a risk of injury. Do not transport sharp-edged, pointed or fragile objects in the EASY-PACK trunk box. Always store and secure these or similar objects in the trunk outside of the EASYPACK trunk box. ! If you exceed the maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK trunk box, objects can be thrown out of the EASY-PACK trunk box and strike vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always observe the maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK trunk box. Always store and secure heavy objects in the trunk outside of the EASY-PACK trunk box. The maximum permitted load of the EASYPACK trunk box is 22 lbs (10 kg). With a load of above approximately 11 lbs (5 kg), the bottom of the box moves downward until it rests on the mat of the trunk floor. Thus, overloading of the box is avoided. Pull the box out by handle : in the direction of the arrow all the way to the stop. X Lowering the load surface: push the center of load surface ; down by hand in the direction of the arrow until load surface ; has reached the desired position and the box is the desired size. X To raise the load surface: press switch =. Load surface ; of the box moves up automatically. X To stow the box: push the box in by handle : all the way to the stop. X Removing and installing X To install: insert retainer ; of box : into slots = Z Stowage and features Important safety notes Stowage areas Stowage and features 226 Raise box : and press hooks A into anchorage ? as far as they will go. X Turn left-hand rotating catch B clockwise and right-hand rotating catch B counterclockwise by 90°. X To remove: turn left-hand rotating catch B counter-clockwise and right-hand rotating catch B clockwise by 90°. X Move box : downwards and pull it out from anchorages ?. X i Store the EASY-PACK trunk box on a flat surface after removal, e.g. on a suitable shelf. Stowage well under the trunk floor ! Unhook the handle before again before closing the trunk lid and clip it in securely to prevent the handle flap from protruding. Otherwise, you could damage the handle. The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are located in the stowage compartment. X To open: pull handle : up. X Hook handle : into rain trough ;. Roof carrier Important safety notes G WARNING When you load the roof, the center of gravity of the vehicle rises and the driving characteristics change. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style. ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use roof carriers that have been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This helps to prevent damage to the vehicle. Position the load on the roof carrier in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. Ensure that, depending on the vehicle's equipment, you can raise the sliding sunroof fully and open the trunk lid fully when the roof carrier is installed. ! To avoid damaging or scratching the covers, do not use metallic or hard objects to open them. You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section (Y page 312). Features Attaching the roof carrier Open covers : carefully in the direction of the arrow. X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchorage points under covers :. X Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. Sun visors Overview G WARNING If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an accident. Always keep the mirror cover folded down while driving. X Mirror light Bracket Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket Vanity mirror Mirror cover Features : ; = ? A Information in the Digital Operator's Manual Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RCup holder holder RRear window roller sunblind RAshtray RCigarette lighter R12 V sockets RBottle In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RVanity RGlare mirror in the sun visor from the side mbrace Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RDownloading destinations in COMAND & Send RVehicle remote opening RSearch Z Stowage and features An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load may become detached from the vehicle. You must therefore ensure that you observe the roof carrier manufacturer's installation instructions. 227 228 Features RVehicle remote closing vehicle recovery service RVehicle remote malfunction diagnosis RDownloading routes RSpeed alert RGeo fencing RTriggering the vehicle alarm RStolen Stowage and features i The mbrace system is only available in the USA. General notes The mbrace system is only available in the USA. You must have a license agreement to activate the mbrace service. Make sure that your system is activated and operational. To log in, press the ï MB Info call button. If any of the steps mentioned are not carried out, the system may not be activated. If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 Shortly after successfully registering with the mbrace service, a user ID and password will be sent to you by mail. You can use this password to log onto the mbrace area under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. The system is available if: Rit has been activated and is operational Rthe corresponding mobile phone network is available for transmitting data to the Customer Center Ra service subscription is available Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged Determining the location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if: RGPS reception is available. vehicle position can be forwarded to the Customer Assistance Center. Rthe The mbrace system To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as follows: X Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Use the COMAND/Audio 20 volume control. The system offers various services, e.g.: RAutomatic and manual emergency call Assistance call RMB Info call You can find information and a description of all available features under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. RRoadside System self-test After you have switched on the ignition, the system carries out a self-diagnosis. A malfunction in the system has been detected if one of the following occurs: RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does not come on during the system self-test. RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside Assistance button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system. RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system. RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the following buttons continues to light up red after the system self-diagnosis: - SOS button - F Roadside Assistance call button - ï MB Info call button RThe Inoperative or the Service Not Activated message appears in the multifunction display after the system self-diagnosis. If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as expected. In the event of an emergency, help will have to be summoned by other means. Features Emergency call Important safety notes G WARNING It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle, even if you have pressed the SOS button in an emergency if: Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi- cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident vehicle is on a dangerous section of road Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be seen by other road users, particularly when dark or in poor visibility conditions There is a risk of an accident and injury. Leave the vehicle immediately in this or similar situations as soon as it is safe to do so. Move to a safe location along with other vehicle occupants. In such situations, secure the vehicle in accordance with national regulations, e. g. with a warning triangle. Rthe General notes Observe the notes on system activation (Y page 228). An emergency call is dialed automatically if an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is triggered. You cannot end an automatically triggered emergency call yourself. An emergency call can also be initiated manually. As soon as the emergency call has been initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes. The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted. Once the connection has been made, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display. All important information on the emergency is transmitted, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as determined by the GPS system) Rvehicle identification number Rinformation on the severity of the accident Shortly after the emergency call has been initiated, a voice connection is automatically established between the Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center attempts to get more information on the emergency. RIf there is no response from the vehicle occupants, an ambulance is immediately sent to the vehicle. If no voice connection can be established to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, the system has been unable to initiate an emergency call. This can occur, for example, if the relevant mobile phone network is not available. The indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes continuously. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display and must be confirmed. In this case, summon assistance by other means. Making an emergency call Z Stowage and features Have the system checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the following service hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 229 Features 230 To initiate an emergency call manually: press cover : briefly to open. X Press SOS button ; briefly. The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes until the emergency call is concluded. X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. X After the emergency call, close cover :. Stowage and features X If the mobile phone network is unavailable, mbrace will not be able to make the emergency call. If you leave the vehicle immediately after pressing the SOS button, you will not know whether mbrace placed the emergency call. In this case, always summon assistance by other means. Roadside Assistance button X To call Roadside Assistance: press Roadside Assistance button :. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance button : flashes while the call is active. The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted. If a connection can be made, the Call Con nected message appears in the multifunction display. If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle identification number The COMAND/Audio 20 display indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button in COMAND/Audio 20, for example. Voice output is not available in this case. A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center can ascertain the nature of the problem. In the Digital Operator's Manual, you will find information on remote malfunction diagnosis. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center either sends a qualified MercedesBenz technician or makes arrangements for your vehicle to be transported to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You may be charged for services such as repair work and/or towing. You can find more information in the separate mbrace manual. The system has not been able to initiate a Roadside Assistance call, if: Rvehicle Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assistance call button F is flashing continuously. voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was established. This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display. Rno Features X To end a call: press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Press the corresponding COMAND/Audio 20 button for ending a phone call. MB Info call button 231 You receive information about operating your vehicle, about the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center and about other products and services from Mercedes-Benz. You can find further information on the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. The system has not been able to initiate an MB Info call, if: X To call MB Info: press MB Info call button :. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in MB Info call button : flashes while the connection is being made. The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted. If a connection can be made, the Call Con nected message appears in the multifunction display. If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle identification number The COMAND/Audio 20 display indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button in COMAND/Audio 20, for example. Voice output is not available in this case. A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. Rvehicle indicator lamp in MB Info call button ï is flashing continuously. Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was established. This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display. X To end a call: press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Press the corresponding COMAND/Audio 20 button for ending a phone call. Call priority When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency call can still be initiated. In this case, an emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls. The indicator lamp of the respective button flashes until the call is ended. An emergency call can only be terminated by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. All other calls can be ended by pressing: Rthe ~ button on the multifunction steer- ing wheel corresponding button in COMAND/ Audio 20 to end the voice call When a call is initiated, the audio system is muted. Rthe Z Stowage and features Rthe 232 Features The mobile phone is no longer connected to COMAND/Audio 20. However, if you want to use your mobile phone, do so only when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe location. Garage door opener Stowage and features General notes The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up to three different door and gate systems. Use the integrated garage door opener only on garage doors that: Rhave safety stop and reverse features and Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards Once programed, the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. When programming a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the engine while programming. Certain garage door drives are incompatible with the integrated garage door opener. If you have difficulty programing the integrated garage door opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Alternatively, you can call the following telephone assistance services: USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4 Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4 Important safety notes G WARNING When you operate or program the garage door with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the garage door can become trapped or struck by the garage door. There is a risk of injury. When using the integrated garage door opener, always make sure that nobody is within the range of movement of the garage door. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. Programing Programming buttons Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 232). RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of charge) More information on HomeLink® and/or compatible products is also available online at http://www.homelink.com. Notes on the declaration of conformity (Y page 29). RCanada: Garage door remote control A is not included with the integrated garage door opener. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 127). X Select one of buttons ; to ? to use to control the garage door drive. To start programming mode: press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage door opener. The garage door opener is now in programming mode. After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up yellow. Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon as button ;, = or ? is programming for the first time. If the selected button has already been programmed, indicator lamp : will only light up yellow after ten seconds have elapsed. X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. X To program the remote control: point garage door remote control A towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm). X Press and hold button B on remote control A until indicator lamp : lights up green. When indicator lamp : lights up green: programming is finished. When indicator lamp : flashes green: programming was successful. The next step is to synchronize the rolling code (Y page 233). X Release button B on remote control A for the garage door drive system. If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the programing procedure for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control A and the rear-view mirror. The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. X Synchronizing the rolling code Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 232). If the garage door system uses a rolling code, you will also have to synchronize the garage door system with the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will need to use the programming button on the door drive control panel. The programming button may be positioned in different places depending on the manufacturer. It is usually located on the door drive unit on the garage ceiling. Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Programming of additional remote controls", before carrying out the following steps. Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage door or gate opener drive. Make sure that neither your vehicle nor any persons/ objects are present within the sweep of the door or gate. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 127). X Get out of the vehicle. X Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate the next step. X Get into the vehicle. X Press previously programmed button ;, = or ? on the integrated garage door opener multiple times until the door closes. The rolling code synchronization is then complete. Notes on programming the remote control Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break" (or interruption) of the transmission signals after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore, these signals may not last long enough for the integrated garage door opener. The signal is not recognized during programming. Comparable with Canadian law, some U.S. garage door openers also feature a "break". Z 233 Stowage and features Features 234 Features Proceed as follows: Rif you live in Canada you have difficulties programming the garage door opener (regardless of where you live) when using the programming steps X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage door opener. After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up yellow. X Release the button. Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. X Press button B of garage door remote control A for two seconds, then release it for two seconds. X Press button B again for two seconds. X Repeat this sequence on button B of remote control A until indicator lamp : lights up green. When indicator lamp : lights up green: programming is finished. When indicator lamp : flashes green: programming was successful. The next step is to synchronize the rolling code. X Release button B of remote control A of the garage door drive. If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the programming process for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control A and the rear-view mirror. The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. Stowage and features Rif Problems when programming If you are experiencing problems programing the integrated garage door opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of the following instructions: RCheck the transmitter frequency used by garage door drive remote control A and whether it is supported. The transmitter frequency can usually be found on the back of the garage door drive remote control. The integrated garage door opener is compatible with devices that have units which operate in the frequency range of 280 to 433 MHz. RReplace the batteries in garage door remote control A. This increases the likelihood that garage door remote control A will transmit a strong and precise signal to the integrated garage door opener. RWhen programming, hold remote control A at varying distances and angles from the button which you are programming. Try various angles at a distance between 2and 12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle but at varying distances. RIf another remote control is available for the same garage door drive, repeat the same programming steps with this remote control. Before performing these steps, make sure that new batteries have been installed in garage door drive remote control A. RNote that some remote controls only transmit for a limited amount of time (the indicator lamp on the remote control goes out). Press button B on remote control A again before transmission ends. RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door opener unit. This can improve signal reception/transmission. Opening/closing the garage door After it has been programmed, the integrated garage door opener performs the function of the garage door system remote control. Features Clearing the memory Make sure that you clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener before selling the vehicle. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 127). X Press and hold buttons ; and ?. The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow and then green. X Release buttons ; and ?. The memory of the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared. loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another. Slide the relevant seat back. To install: place the floormat in the footwell. X Press studs : onto retainers ;. X To remove: pull the floormat off retainers ;. X Remove the floormat. X X Floormats G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use Z Stowage and features Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 127). X Press button ;, = or ? which you have programmed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with a fixed code: indicator lamp : lights up green. Garage door system with a rolling code: indicator lamp : flashes green. The transmitter will transmit a signal as long as the button is pressed. The transmission is halted after a maximum of ten seconds and indicator lamp : lights up yellow. X Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary. 235 236 237 Useful information ............................ 238 Engine compartment ........................ 238 Maintenance ...................................... 242 Maintenance and care Care .................................................... 242 238 Engine compartment Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. Engine compartment off the ignition reach into the area where there is a risk of danger from moving components, such as the fan rotation area Rremove jewelry and watches Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts Hood G WARNING i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 29). Maintenance and care G WARNING The engine compartment contains moving components. Certain components, such as the radiator fan, may continue to run or start again suddenly when the ignition is off. There is a risk of injury. If you need to do any work inside the engine compartment: Important safety notes G WARNING If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view. There is a risk of an accident. Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. G WARNING When opening and closing the hood, it may suddenly fall into the closed position. There is a risk of injury to persons within range of movement of the hood. Open and close the hood only when no one is within its range of movement. G WARNING Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury. Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department. Rswitch Rnever The ignition system and the fuel injection system work under high voltage. If you touch components which are under voltage, you could get an electric shock. There is a risk of injury. Never touch components of the ignition system or fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on. Opening the hood G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. G WARNING When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood. Engine compartment Engine oil General notes Depending on your driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per 600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be in a different location. When checking the oil level: Rpark the vehicle on a level surface. engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature. Rif the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly, wait about 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement. Rthe Make sure that the windshield wipers are turned off. X Pull release lever : on the hood. The hood is released. X Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle ; up and lift the hood. If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in (40 cm), the hood is opened and held open automatically by the gas-filled strut. G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. Closing the hood Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of approximately 8 in (20 cm). X Check that the hood has engaged properly. If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force. X Z Maintenance and care ! Make sure that the windshield wipers are not folded away from the windshield. You could otherwise damage the windshield wipers or the hood. 239 Engine compartment 240 Damage to the engine or exhaust system is caused by the following: Example Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide tube. X Wipe off oil dipstick :. X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again. If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or below, add 1.0 l of engine oil. X Maintenance and care Adding engine oil G WARNING Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have not been specifically approved for the service system Rreplacing engine oil and oil filters after the interval for replacement specified by the service system has been exceeded Rusing engine oil additives. ! Do not add too much oil. adding too much engine oil can result in damage to the engine or to the catalytic converter. Have excess engine oil siphoned off. Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. G WARNING If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and thoroughly clean the engine oil off the components before starting the engine. H Environmental note When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment. ! Only use engine oils and oil filters that have been approved for vehicles with a service system. You can obtain a list of the engine oils and oil filters tested and approved in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service center. Example Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove it. X Add engine oil. If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of engine oil. X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn clockwise. Ensure that the cap locks into place securely. X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick (Y page 239). X Further information on engine oil (Y page 309). Engine compartment Checking coolant level G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. G WARNING The engine cooling system is pressurized, particularly when the engine is warm. When opening the cap, you could be scalded by hot coolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury. Let the engine cool down before opening the cap. Wear eye and hand protection when opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a turn to allow pressure to escape. Park the vehicle on a level surface. Only check the coolant level when the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 127). On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button twice (Y page 128). X Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be below 158 ‡ (70 †). X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock (Y page 127). X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counterclockwise to allow excess pressure to escape. X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and remove it. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar = in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in (1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the filler neck when warm, there is enough coolant in expansion tank ;. X If necessary, add coolant that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. X For further information on coolant, see (Y page 310). Adding washer fluid to the windshield washer system/headlamp cleaning system G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. G WARNING Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. Z Maintenance and care Additional service products 241 Care 242 Do not scrub. Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film. To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. Add the premixed washer fluid. X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck until it engages. X Maintenance and care X If the washer fluid level drops below the recommended minimum of 1 liter, a message appears in the multifunction display prompting you to add washer fluid. Further information on windshield washer fluid/antifreeze (Y page 311). Maintenance ASSYST PLUS The Digital Operator's Manual contains more information on the ASSYST PLUS service interval display. Care General notes H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner. ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following: Rdry, rough or hard cloths cleaning agents Rsolvents Rcleaning agents containing solvents Rabrasive ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked. Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining the quality in the long term. Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Exterior care Automatic car wash G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until full braking power is restored. ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen Rin towing the vehicle the car wash ! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless Automatic Car Wash as these use special cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can damage the paintwork or plastic parts. Care ! In car washes with a towing mechanism, make sure that the automatic transmission is in transmission position N, otherwise the vehicle could be damaged. RVehicles with a SmartKey: Do not remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Do not open the driver's door or front-passenger door when the engine is switched off. Otherwise, the automatic transmission selects park position P automatically and locks the wheels. You can prevent this by shifting the automatic transmission to N beforehand. RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Do not open the driver's door or frontpassenger door when the engine is switched off. Otherwise, the automatic transmission selects park position P automatically and locks the wheels. Observe the following to make sure that the automatic transmission stays in position N: X Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched off. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 127). Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/ Stop button on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start. If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before cleaning it in an automatic car wash. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windshield and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windshield. Information in the Digital Operator's Manual In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RWashing by hand washers RCleaning the paintwork RMatte finish care RCleaning the wheels RCleaning the windows RCleaning wiper blades RCleaning the exterior lighting RCleaning the mirror turn signals RCleaning the sensors RCleaning the rear view camera RCleaning the exhaust pipes RPower Interior care In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find information on the following topics: RCleaning the display the plastic trim RCleaning the steering wheel and gear or selector lever RCleaning genuine wood and trim strips RCleaning the seat covers RCleaning the seat belts RCleaning the headliner and carpets RCleaning Z Maintenance and care ! Make sure that: Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof are fully closed. Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off (the OFF button has been pressed). Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position 0. Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged. 243 244 245 Useful information ............................ 246 Where will I find...? ........................... 246 Flat tire .............................................. 247 Battery (vehicle) ................................ 251 Jump-starting .................................... 255 Towing and tow-starting .................. 257 Breakdown assistance Fuses .................................................. 260 Where will I find...? 246 Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. Breakdown assistance i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 29). The vehicle tool kit contains: RFolding RFuse wheel chock allocation chart RJack RAlignment bolt pair of gloves RLug wrench RTowing eye ROne Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Where will I find...? Vehicle tool kit General notes The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stowage well under the trunk floor (Y page 226). Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel (Example: equipment and country-specific variations possible) : Vehicle tool kit tray ; Stowage well = "Minispare" emergency spare wheel Open the trunk lid. X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 226). X (Example: equipment and country-specific variations possible) : Towing eye ; One pair of gloves = Jack ? Folding wheel chock A Alignment bolt B Sheet for faulty wheel C Tire inflation compressor D Lug wrench E Fuse allocation chart X X Open the trunk lid. Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 226). Vehicles with alloy wheels and hub caps On vehicles with alloy wheels and hub caps, a socket is also provided. Flat tire Preparing the vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with: RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) (Y page 247) Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tires Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 246) Ran emergency spare wheel (Y page 297) Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Information on changing/mounting a wheel (Y page 286). X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground, as far away as possible from traffic. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X If possible, bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position. X Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that "normal" level is selected (Y page 151). X Switch off the engine. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or, on vehicles with KEYLESS GO: X Open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. X Remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 128). X Make sure that the passengers are not endangered as they do so. Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier. X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so. X Close the driver's door. MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) General notes With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. The affected tire must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking next to the tire size designation, the loadbearing capacity and the speed index (Y page 280). MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure loss warning system or with an active tire pressure monitor. If a pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display: Robserve the instructions in the display mes- sages (Y page 183). the tire for damage. Rif driving on, observe the following notes. The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehicle is partially laden and approximately 18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fully laden. In addition to the vehicle load, the driving distance possible depends upon: Rcheck Rvehicle speed condition Routside temperature Rroad Breakdown assistance Flat tire 247 248 Flat tire The driving distance possible in run-flat mode may be reduced by extreme driving conditions or maneuvers, or it can be increased through a moderate style of driving. The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is counted from the moment the tire pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction display. You must not exceed a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). When replacing one or all tires, please observe the following specifications for your vehicle's tires: Rsize Breakdown assistance Rthe type and "MOExtended" mark If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may be used as a temporary measure. Make sure that you use the proper size and type (summer or winter tire). Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Rthe Important safety notes G WARNING When driving in emergency mode, the driving characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when cornering, accelerating quickly and when braking. There is a risk of an accident. Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers, and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle. Stop driving in emergency mode if: Ryou Rthe hear banging noises. vehicle starts to shake. Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. RESP® is intervening constantly. are tears in the sidewalls of the tire. After driving in emergency mode, have the wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use. The defective tire must be replaced in every case. Rthere TIREFIT kit Important safety notes TIREFIT is a tire sealant. You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †). G WARNING In the following situations, the tire sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly: Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger than those mentioned above. Rthe wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or on a flat tire. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING The tire sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following: RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin immediately with water. RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Flat tire 249 RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tire sealant. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. Pull plug ? with the cable and hose A out of the housing. X Screw hose A onto flange B of tire sealant bottle :. X Place tire sealant bottle : head downwards into recess ; of the tire inflation compressor. X Using the TIREFIT kit Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty tire. X Screw filler hose D onto valve C. X Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails. X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation compressor from the stowage well underneath the trunk floor (Y page 246). X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision. X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tire. X Insert connector ? into a 12 V socket (Y page 227) in your vehicle. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 127). X Press on and off switch = on the tire inflation compressor to I. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The pressure can briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). X Z Breakdown assistance ! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tire inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instructions on the sticker on the tire inflation compressor. Flat tire 250 Breakdown assistance Do not switch off the tire inflation compressor during this phase. X Allow the tire inflation compressor to run for five minutes. The tire should then have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi). If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pressure reached" (Y page 250). If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pressure not reached" (Y page 250). If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. It can then be removed like a layer of film. If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry cleaner as soon as possible. Tire pressure not reached If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been attained after five minutes: Switch off the tire inflation compressor. Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire. X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 30 ft (10 m). X Pump up the tire again. After a maximum of five minutes the tire pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/ 26 psi). X X G WARNING If the required tire pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Tire pressure reached G WARNING A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant. The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instrument cluster in the driver's field of vision. ! Residue from the tire sealant may come out of the filler hose after use. This could cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag which contained the TIREFIT kit. H Environmental note Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop. If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been attained after five minutes: Switch off the tire inflation compressor. Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire. X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire inflation compressor. X Pull away immediately. X Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tire pressure with the tire inflation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). X X G WARNING If the required tire pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair Battery (vehicle) i In cases such as the one mentioned above, contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap for values. X To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire inflation compressor. Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop. X Battery (vehicle) Important safety notes Special tools and expert knowledge are required when working on the battery, e.g. removal and installation. You should therefore have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can lead, for example, to a short circuit and thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can lead to function restrictions applying to safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting system, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You could lose control of the vehicle, for example: Rwhen braking the event of abrupt steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions There is a risk of an accident. In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive any further. You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Rin X To reduce the tire pressure: depress pressure release button E next to pressure gauge F. When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire. X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the sealed tire. X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire inflation compressor. The filler hose remains attached to the tire sealant bottle. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tire changed there. X For further information about ABS and ESP®, see (Y page 70) and (Y page 76). G WARNING Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation of sparks, which could ignite the highly explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Z Breakdown assistance the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. 251 252 Battery (vehicle) Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing electrostatic build-up. The highly flammable gas mixture forms when charging the battery as well as when jumpstarting. Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. A buildup of electrostatic charge can be caused, for example: Breakdown assistance Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic fibers Rdue to friction between clothing and seats Rif you push or pull the battery across the carpet or other synthetic materials Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batter- ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention. H Environmental note Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or a special collection point for used batteries. ! Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet or contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information. ! You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. In the exceptional case that it is necessary for you to disconnect the battery yourself, make sure that: Ryou switch off the engine and remove the SmartKey. On vehicles with KEYLESSGO, ensure that the ignition is switched off. Check that all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster are off. Otherwise, electronic components, such as the alternator, may be damaged. Ryou first remove the negative terminal clamp and then the positive terminal clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged. Rthe transmission is locked in position P after disconnecting the battery. The vehicle is secured against rolling away. You can then no longer move the vehicle. Battery (vehicle) Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion. Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, especially gloves, apron and faceguard. Rinse any acid spills immediately with clear water. Contact a physician if necessary. Wear eye protection. Keep children away. Observe this Operator's Manual. can also charge the battery with a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for further information. Have the battery condition of charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked for a long period of time. i Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle and do not require any electrical consumers. The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power. i If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you will have to: Rset the clock. Information on setting the clock can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. On vehicles with COMAND and a navigation system, the clock is set automatically. Rreset the function for folding the exterior mirrors in/out automatically, by folding the mirrors out once (Y page 107). Charging the battery For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident. In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. The vehicle battery, like other batteries, can discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. In this case, have the battery disconnected at a qualified specialist workshop. You G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batterZ Breakdown assistance The battery and the cover of the positive terminal clamp must be installed securely during operation. 253 254 Battery (vehicle) ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. Breakdown assistance ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. ! Only charge the battery using the jumpstarting connection point. The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (Y page 255). X Open the hood. X Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and ground point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 255). If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge the battery nor jumpstart the vehicle. The service life of a thawedout battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Never charge a battery still installed in the vehicle unless a battery charger unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is being used . A battery charger unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an accessory. It permits the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information and availability. Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. Jump-starting 255 Jump-starting For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention. During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. ! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by the non-combusted fuel. Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables. Observe the following points: RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold. RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. Z Breakdown assistance G WARNING 256 Jump-starting ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating. ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly. sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Make sure that: RMake Rthe jumper cables are not damaged. the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal sections. Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan. X Apply the parking brake firmly. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc. X Open the hood. Breakdown assistance Rwhen Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jumpstarting device. X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow. X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first. X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicle B first. X Start the engine. X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes. Towing and tow-starting 257 First, remove the jumper cables from ground point A and negative terminal ?, then from positive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first. X Close cover : of positive clamp ; after removing the jumper cables. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition. Towing and tow-starting Important safety notes G WARNING Functions relevant to safety are restricted or no longer available if: Rthe engine is not running. brake system or the power steering is malfunctioning. Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical system. If your vehicle is being towed, much more force may be necessary to steer or brake. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing, make sure that the steering moves freely. Rthe G WARNING When towing or tow-starting another vehicle and its weight is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle, the: Rthe towing eye could detach itself vehicle/trailer combination could rollover. There is a risk of an accident. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle. Rthe i Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 306). ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen Rin towing the vehicle the car wash ! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. ! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. ! When towing, pull away slowly and smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. ! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This could damage the vehicle. ! When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the key instead of the Start/Stop button. Otherwise, the automatic transmission may shift to position P when the driver's or front-passenger door are opened, which could lead to damage to the transmission. ! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of 30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded. If the vehicle has to be towed more than 30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be raised and transported. Z Breakdown assistance i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. 258 Towing and tow-starting ! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its weight must not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle. It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed away. If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage, have it transported on a transporter or trailer. The automatic transmission must be in position N when the vehicle is being towed. The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you: turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to position N In the event of damage to the electrical system If the battery is defective, the automatic transmission will be locked in position P. To shift the automatic transmission to position N, you must provide power to the vehicle's electrical system in the same way as when jump-starting (Y page 255). Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer. Breakdown assistance Rcannot Example: towing eye covers i Disarm the automatic locking feature (Y page 91). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle. Towing eye covers (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Installing/removing the towing eye Installing the towing eye G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe may be very hot. There is a risk of burns when removing the rear cover. Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particular care when removing the rear cover. The mountings for the removable towing eyes are located in the bumpers. They are at the front and at the rear, behind the covers. X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 246). X Pull cover : out of the bumper in the direction of the arrow by inserting your fingers into the recess. X Press the mark on cover ; inwards in the direction of the arrow. Towing and tow-starting X X Take cover ; off the opening. Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten it. Removing the towing eye Unscrew and remove the towing eye. Position cover : on top of the bumper and press it in at the bottom until it engages. X Attach cover ; to the bumper and press until it engages. X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit. X 259 i When towing with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination switch as usual to signal a change of direction. In this case, only the indicator lamps for the direction of travel flash. After resetting the combination switch, the hazard warning lamp starts flashing again. X It is important that you observe the safety instructions when towing away your vehicle (Y page 257). The automatic transmission automatically shifts to position P when you open the driver's or front-passenger door or when you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. In order to ensure that the automatic transmission stays in position N when towing the vehicle, you must observe the following points: Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the key is in position 0 in the ignition lock. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button (Y page 129). X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the parking brake. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps, see the Digital Operator's Manual. X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the ignition lock. X ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission. ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be towed with the rear axle raised. The vehicle/trailer combination may otherwise swerve or even roll over. ! The ignition must be switched off if you are towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised. Intervention by ESP® could otherwise damage the brake system. Transporting the vehicle ! You may only secure the vehicle by the wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for transporting purposes. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. As soon as the vehicle has been loaded: Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. X Shift the automatic transmission to position P. X Z Breakdown assistance Towing a vehicle with both axles on the ground Towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised Fuses 260 Turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 0 and remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Secure the vehicle. X Breakdown assistance Notes on 4MATIC vehicles ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission. If the vehicle has transmission damage or damage to the front or rear axle, have it transported on a transporter or trailer. In the event of damage to the electrical system If the battery is defective, the automatic transmission will be locked in position P. To shift the automatic transmission to position N, you must provide power to the vehicle's electrical system in the same way as when jump-starting (Y page 255). Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer. Tow-starting (emergency engine starting) ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be started by tow-starting. This could otherwise damage the transmission. i You can find information on "Jump-starting" under (Y page 255). Fuses Important safety notes G WARNING If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric cables could be overloaded. This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always replace faulty fuses with the specified new fuses having the correct amperage. ! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged. The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions stop operating. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart. If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Before changing a fuse Pay attention to the important safety notes (Y page 260). X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 137). X Switch off the engine. X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or, on vehicles with KEYLESS GO: X Open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. X Remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 128). All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. Fuses RFuse box in the engine compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel RCLS Coupe:fuse box in the trunk on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel CLS Coupe:the fuse allocation chart is located in the vehicle tool kit in the stowage compartment under the trunk floor (Y page 246). Fuse box in the engine compartment Pay attention to the important safety notes (Y page 260). G WARNING When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. To open: take lines : out of the guides. X Move lines : to one side. X Open retaining clamps ;. X Remove the fuse box cover forwards. X To close: check whether the seal is lying correctly in the cover. X Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse box into the retainer. X Fold down the cover and close clamps ;. X Secure lines : in the guides. X Close the hood. X Fuse box in the trunk Pay attention to the important safety notes (Y page 260). ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. Open the trunk lid. To open: release cover : at the top right and left-hand sides with a flat object. X Open cover : downwards in the direction of the arrow. X X Make sure that the windshield wipers are turned off. X Open the hood. X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from the fuse box. X Z Breakdown assistance The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: 261 262 263 Useful information ............................ 264 Important safety notes ..................... 264 Operation ........................................... 264 Winter operation ............................... 266 Tire pressure ..................................... 267 Loading the vehicle .......................... 275 All about wheels and tires ............... 278 Changing a wheel .............................. 286 Wheel and tire combinations ........... 291 Wheels and tires Emergency spare wheel ................... 297 264 Operation Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 29). Tires with run-flat characteristics: Rpay attention to the information and warning notices on MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics). Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and ask about: Rsuitability Rlegal Important safety notes Wheels and tires G WARNING If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always replace wheels and tires with those that fulfill the specifications of the original part. When replacing wheels, make sure to use the correct: Rdesignation Rmodel When replacing tires, make sure to use the correct: Rdesignation Rmanufacturer Rmodel G WARNING A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Tires without run-flat characteristics: Rdo not drive with a flat tire. replace the flat tire with your emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop. Rimmediately stipulations recommendations Information on the sizes and types of wheels and tires for your vehicle can be found under "Wheel/tire combinations" (Y page 291). Information on tire pressure can be found: Rfactory Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar (Y page 275) Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler flap (Y page 136) Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 267) Operation Information on driving Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip. While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden tire damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. When parking your vehicle, make sure that the tires do not get deformed by the curb or Operation Regular checking of wheels and tires G WARNING Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately. Regularly check the wheels and tires of your vehicle for damage at least once a month, as well as after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particular attention to damage such as: Rcuts in the tires Rpunctures Rtears in the tires Rbulges on tires Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels Regularly check the tire tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tire (Y page 265). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tire surface. All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems. Regularly check the pressure of all the tires particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pressure as necessary (Y page 267). Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (Y page 297). The service life of tires depends, among other things, on the following factors: RDriving style pressure RDistance covered RTire Notes on tire tread G WARNING Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction. The tire is no longer able to dissipate water. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of hydroplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident. If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tire tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires. Minimum tire tread depth for: RSummer tires: â in (3 mm) tires: ã in (4 mm) For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tire tread depth is reached. RM+S Marking : shows where the bar indicator (arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the tire tread. Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread. They are visible once a tread depth of Z Wheels and tires other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, the tires, particularly the sidewalls, may be damaged. 265 266 Winter operation approximately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. If this is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be replaced. Selecting, mounting and replacing tires Wheels and tires ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type and make. Exception: it is permissible to install a different type or make in the event of a flat tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 247). ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the wheels. RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles (100 km). They only reach their full performance after this distance. RDo not drive with tires which have too little tread depth, as this significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). RReplace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (Y page 297). MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure loss warning system or with an active tire pressure monitor and on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz. Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a flat tire (Y page 247). Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Winter operation General notes You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Driving with summer tires At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold temperatures could cause cracks to form, thereby damaging the tires permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage. G WARNING Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately. M+S tires G WARNING M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter and do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of an accident. M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately. Further information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Tire pressure G WARNING If snow chains are installed to the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Rnever install snow chains to the front wheels Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the rear wheels. Further information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Tire pressure Tire pressure specifications Important safety notes G WARNING i The specifications on the sample Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure tables are examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data shown here. The tire pressure specifications that are valid for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure table on the vehicle. General notes The recommended tire pressures for the tires mounted at the factory can be found on the labels described here. Operation with an emergency spare wheel: information on operation with an emergency spare wheel can be found in the general notes in the "Emergency spare wheel" section (Y page 298). Further information on tire pressures can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Tire and Loading Information placard Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the following risks: Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures and check the pressure of all the tires including the spare wheel: Rmonthly, at least the load changes Rbefore beginning a long journey Runder different operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving If necessary, correct the tire pressure. Rif : Recommended tire pressures The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 275). The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed. Z Wheels and tires Snow chains 267 268 Tire pressure Tire pressure table The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Example: tire pressure table for all tires permitted for this vehicle by the factory Wheels and tires The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions. Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire pressure information following is only valid for that tire size. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different numbers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ. Some tire pressure tables show only the rim diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire sidewall (Y page 280). If the tire pressures have been set to the lower values for lighter loads and/or lower road speeds, the pressures should be reset to the higher values: Rif you want to drive with an increased load and/or Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds i The tire pressures for increased loads and/or higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure table, may have a negative effect on driving comfort. If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can lead to an excessive build up of heat and a sudden loss of pressure. For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Important notes on tire pressure G WARNING If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire pressure that is too low may result in a tire blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. RCheck the tire for foreign objects. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. Tire pressure G WARNING If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pressure monitors keep the tire valve open. This can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a risk of an accident. Only screw the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve. Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with the electronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure can be checked in the on-board computer. The tire temperature and pressure increase when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent on the driving speed and the load. Therefore, you should only correct tire pressures when the tires are cold. The tires are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked without direct sunlight on the tires for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km) The tire temperature changes depending on the outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the tire load. If the tire temperature changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/ 1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is too low for the current operating conditions. If you check the tire pressure when the tires are warm, the resulting value will be higher than if the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire pressure to the value specified for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be too low. Observe the recommended tire pressures for cold tires: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap Underinflated or overinflated tires Underinflated tires G WARNING Tires with pressure that is too low can overheat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the tires, including the spare wheel. Underinflated tires may: Roverheat, leading to tire defects affect handling Rwear excessively and/or unevenly Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption Radversely Overinflated tires G WARNING Tires with excessively high pressure can burst because they are damaged more easily by road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the tires, including the spare wheel. Overinflated tires may: Rincrease the braking distance Radversely affect handling Z Wheels and tires If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. 269 270 Tire pressure excessively and/or unevenly an adverse effect on ride comfort Rbe more susceptible to damage Checking tire pressures manually Maximum tire pressures Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be checked. X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve. X Read the tire pressure and compare it to the recommended value on the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure table (Y page 267). X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value. X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. To do so, press down the metal pin in the valve, using the tip of a pen for example. Then check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure checker. X Screw the valve cap onto the valve. X Repeat these steps for the other tires. Rwear Rhave : Example: maximum permissible tire pres- Wheels and tires sure Never exceed the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure. Always observe the recommended tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 267). i The actual values for tires are vehiclespecific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. Checking the tire pressures Important safety notes Observe the notes on tire pressure (Y page 267). Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found: Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler flap Rin the "Tire pressure" section To determine and set the correct tire pressure, proceed as follows: X Tire pressure loss warning system (Canada only) General notes While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure loss warning system monitors the set tire pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning message will appear in the multifunction display. You can recognize the tire pressure loss warning by the Run Flat Indicator Active Press 'OK' to Restart message which appears in the Serv. menu of the multifunction display. Information on the message display can be found in the "Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system" section (Y page 271). Tire pressure The tire pressure warning system does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure (Y page 267). The tire pressure loss warning does not replace the need to regularly check the tire pressure. An even loss of pressure on several tires at the same time cannot be detected by the tire pressure loss warning system. The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers. The function of the tire pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if: Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's tires. Rroad conditions are wintry. Ryou are driving on sand or gravel. Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates of acceleration). Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehicle or on the roof). Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system Restart the tire pressure loss warning system if you have: Rchanged the tire pressure Rchanged the wheels or tires Rmounted new wheels or tires X Before restarting, make sure that the tire pressures are set properly on all four tires for the respective operating conditions. The recommended tire pressure can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Additionally, a tire pressure table is attached to the fuel filler flap. The tire pressure loss warning system can only give reli- able warnings if you have set the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored. X Also observe the notes in the section on tire pressures (Y page 267). X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 127). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. X Press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the Tire Pressure menu. X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator Active Press 'OK' to Restart message appears in the multifunction display. If you wish to confirm the restart: Press the a button. The Tire Pressure Now OK? message appears in the multifunction display. X Press the 9 or : button to select Yes. X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator Restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After a teach-in period, the tire pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tire pressures of all four tires. X If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. or When the Tire Pressure Now OK? message appears, press the 9 or : button to select Cancel. X Press the a button. The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. X Z Wheels and tires Important safety notes 271 272 Tire pressure Tire pressure monitor General notes Wheels and tires If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehicle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only functions if the corresponding sensors are installed in all wheels. Information on tire pressures is displayed in the multifunction display. After a few minutes of driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the Service menu of the multifunction display, see illustration (example). For information on the message display, refer to the "Checking the tire pressure electronically" section (Y page 273). Important safety notes G WARNING Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked at least once every two weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard or, if available, the tire pressure label, you should determine the proper tire pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale lights up, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will flash for approximately a minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will be repeated every time the vehicle is started as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of incompatible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate Tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to that recommended for cold tires which is suitable for the operating situation (Y page 267). Note that the correct tire pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the warning threshold for the warning message is Tire pressure Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire pressure on one or more tires is significantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is not malfunctioning. Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a minute and then remains lit constantly, the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. In addition to the warning lamp, a message appears in the multifunction display. Observe the information on display messages (Y page 183). It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunction of the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. A malfunction will be indicated by the tire pressure warning lamp flashing for approximately one minute and then remaining lit. When the malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of driving. The tire pressure values indicated by the onboard computer may differ from those measured at a gas station with a pressure gage. The tire pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a pressure gage are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures. The operation of the tire pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle. Checking the tire pressure electronically Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 127). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tire Pressure. X Press the a button. The current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the multifunction display. X If the vehicle has been parked for over 20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes message appears. After a teach-in process, the tire pressure monitor automatically detects new wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire pressure value to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active display message is shown instead of the tire pressure display. The tire pressures are already being monitored. If an emergency spare wheel is mounted, the system may continue to show the tire pressure of the wheel that has been removed for a few minutes. If this occurs, note that the value displayed for the position where the spare wheel is mounted is not the same as the current tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel. Z Wheels and tires aligned to the reference values taught-in. Restart the tire pressure monitor after adjusting the pressure of the cold tires (Y page 274). The current pressures are saved as new reference values. As a result, a warning message will appear if the tire pressure drops significantly. The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure (Y page 267). The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers. The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating pressure loss or a malfunction. Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning: 273 274 Tire pressure Tire pressure monitor warning messages If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure loss in one or more tires, a warning message is shown in the multifunction display and the yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp comes on. the Correct Tire Pressure message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low and must be corrected at the next opportunity. RIf the Check Tires message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly and the tires must be checked. RIf the Warning Tire Malfunction message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly and the tires must be checked. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the display messages in the "Tires" section (Y page 183). If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated, the tire pressures may be displayed for the wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pressures are displayed for the correct positions. Wheels and tires RIf uation on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's side B-pillar (Y page 267). Additional tire pressure values for different loads can also be found on the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap (Y page 267). X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on all four wheels. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tire Pressure. X Press the a button. The multifunction display shows the current tire pressure for the individual tires or the Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes message. X Press the : button. The Use Current Pressures as New Reference Values message appears in the multifunction display. If you wish to confirm the restart: X Restarting the tire pressure monitor When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tire pressures as the reference values for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. However, you can also define reference values manually as described here. The tire pressure monitor then monitors the new tire pressure values. X Set the tire pressure to the value recommended for the corresponding driving sit- Press the a button. The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pressures are within the specified range. The new tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. Radio type approval for the tire pressure monitor In certain countries, a radio type approval for the tire pressure monitor may be required. Loading the vehicle 275 The radio type approval number for the tire pressure monitor can be found in the "Wheels and tires" section of the Digital Operator's Manual. Loading the vehicle Instruction labels for tires and loads G WARNING Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and driving characteristics and lead to brake failure. There is a risk of accident. Observe the load rating of the tires. The load rating must be at least half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load. : B-pillar, driver's side Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the maximum permissible number of occupants and the maximum permissible vehicle load. It also contains details of the tire sizes and corresponding pressures for tires mounted at the factory. (2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle identification plate informs you of the gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You can also find information about the maximum gross axle weight rating on the front and rear axle. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed the maximum load or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle. X Specification for maximum gross vehicle weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading Information placard: "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs." The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage must not exceed the specified value. i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating is vehiclespecific and may differ from that in the illustration. You can find the valid maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Z Wheels and tires Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the maximum possible load. 276 Loading the vehicle Number of seats Wheels and tires Maximum number of seats : indicates the maximum number of occupants allowed to travel in the vehicle. This information can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard. i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from the details shown. The number of seats in your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Determining the correct load limit Step-by-step instructions The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information placard. X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs. Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4. X Loading the vehicle 277 Example: steps 1 to 3 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 275). The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load. Step 1 Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants) 5 3 1 Distribution of the occupants Front: 2 Rear: 3 Front: 1 Rear: 2 Front: 1 Weight of the occupants Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg) Occupant 1: 200 lbs Occupant 1: 150 lbs (91 kg) (68 kg) Occupant 2: 190 lbs (86 kg) Occupant 3: 150 lbs (68 kg) Gross weight of all occupants 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) Combined maximum weight of occupants and cargo (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard) 150 lbs (68 kg) Z Wheels and tires Step 2 278 All about wheels and tires Step 3 Wheels and tires Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Permissible load 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò (maximum gross vehi- 750 lbs (340 kg) = cle weight rating from 750 lbs (340 kg) the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 540 lbs (245 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 150 lbs (68 kg) = 1350 lbs (612 kg) Vehicle identification plate All about wheels and tires Even if you have calculated the total cargo carefully, you should still make sure that the gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 275). Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maximum permissible weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible values (gross vehicle weight and maximum gross axle weight rating), have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable) weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Overview of Tire Quality Grading Standards Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S. government specifications. Their purpose is to provide drivers with uniform reliable information on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers have to grade tires using three performance factors: : tread wear grade, ; traction grade and = temperature grade. These regulations do not apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America are provided with the corresponding quality grading markings on the sidewall of the tire. Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. All about wheels and tires RTread wear grade: 200 grade: AA RTemperature grade: A All passenger car tires must conform to the statutory safety requirements in addition to these grades. RTraction i The actual values for tires are vehiclespecific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. Treadwear The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. government course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction G WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. ! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to the drive train. The traction grades – from highest to lowest – are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on dry road surfaces. You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point. Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires. Observe the legally required minimum tire tread depth (Y page 265). Winter tires can reduce the braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in comparison with summer tires. The braking distance is still much further than on surfaces that are not icy or covered with snow. Take appropriate care when driving. Further information on winter tires (M+S tires) can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Temperature G WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Z Wheels and tires Example: 279 280 All about wheels and tires Tire labeling Overview : Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Wheels and tires (Y page 284) ; Department of Transportation, Tire Iden- tification Number (Y page 283) Maximum load rating (Y page 282) Maximum tire pressures (Y page 270) Manufacturer Tire material (Y page 283) Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating (Y page 280) D Load index (Y page 282) E Tire name = ? A B C The markings described above are on the tire in addition to the tire name (sales designation) and the manufacturer's name. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating G WARNING Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There is a risk of accident. Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. : ; = ? A B Tire width Nominal aspect ratio in % Tire code Rim diameter Load bearing index Speed rating General: depending on the manufacturer's standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may not contain any letters or may contain one letter that precedes the size description. If there is no letter preceding the size description (as shown above): these are passenger vehicle tires according to European manufacturing standards. If "P" precedes the size description: these are passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards. If "LT" precedes the size description: these are light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards. If "T" precedes the size description: compact emergency wheels with high tire pressure that are only designed for temporary use in an emergency. Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal tire width in millimeters. Aspect ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size ratio between the tire height and tire width and is shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calcu- All about wheels and tires i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Regardless of the speed rating, always observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Summer tires 1 Index Speed rating H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h) ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). RIf a service specification is available, the maximum speed is limited according to the speed rating in the service specification. Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is the service specification. The letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The maximum speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300 km/h). If the size description of your tire includes "ZR" and there are no service specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out the maximum speed. RThe size description for all tires with maximum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h) must include "ZR", and the service specification must be given in parentheses. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of the tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire manufacturer about the maximum speed. All-weather tires and winter tires Index Speed rating Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) Index Speed rating S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) Or M+S i for winter tires. Z Wheels and tires lated by dividing the tire width by the tire height. Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type. "R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires. Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in inches (in). Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is a numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 275). Example: Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear. For further information on the maximum tire load in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 282). For further information on the load bearing index, see "Load index" (Y page 282). Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire. 281 All about wheels and tires 282 Index Speed rating H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide the driving characteristics of winter tires. In addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also have the i snowflake symbol on the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow. They have been especially developed for driving on snow. An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding the following speeds: Wheels and tires Rall vehicles (except AMG vehicles): 130 mph (210 km/h) RAMG vehicles: 155 mph (250 km/h) RAMG vehicles with Performance Package: 186 mph (300 km/h) The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory may be higher than the maximum speed that the electronic speed limiter permits. Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The required speed rating for your vehicle can be found in the "Tires" section (Y page 291). Further information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. Load index In addition to the load bearing index, load index : may be imprinted after the letters that identify speed index B on the sidewall of the tire (Y page 280). RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the example above), represents a standard load (SL) tire RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire RLight Load: represents a light load tire RC, D, E: represents a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Maximum load rating Maximum tire load : is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissi1 Or M+S i for winter tires. All about wheels and tires ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 275). i The actual values for tires are vehiclespecific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) US tire regulations stipulate that every tire manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire produced. 283 Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire. Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A provides information about the age of a tire. The first and second positions represent the week of manufacture, starting with "01" for the first calendar week. Positions three and four represent the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that is marked "2614" was manufactured in week 26 in 2014. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. The TIN is a unique identification number. The TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible for the purchaser to easily identify the affected tires. The TIN is made up of manufacturer identification code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and manufacturing date A. DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol : marks that the tire complies with the requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Manufacturer identification code: manufacturer identification code ; provides details on the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. For further information about retreaded tires, see (Y page 264). Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size. This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in sidewall : and under tire tread ;. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Definition of terms for tires and loading Tire ply composition and material used Describes the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon, polyester and other materials. Bar Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. Z Wheels and tires Tire characteristics 284 All about wheels and tires DOT (Department of Transportation) DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the U S Department of Transportation. Normal occupant weight The number of occupants for which the vehicle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs). Wheels and tires Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer following specifications from the U.S. government. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. Recommended tire pressures The recommended tire pressure applies to the tires mounted at the factory. The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maximum permissible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment The combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. Rim This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is mounted. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight rating. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Speed rating The speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which the tire is approved. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accessories installed, occupants, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Maximum loaded vehicle weight The maximum weight is the sum of: Rthe curb weight of the vehicle weight of the accessories Rthe load limit Rthe weight of the factory installed optional equipment Rthe Kilopascal (kPa) Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. Load index In addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity more precisely. All about wheels and tires Maximum load rating The maximum load rating is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved. Maximum permissible tire pressure Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire. Maximum load on one tire Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by two. PSI (pounds per square inch) A standard unit of measure for tire pressure. Aspect ratio Relationship between tire height and tire width in percent. Tire pressure Pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to every square inch of the tire's surface. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. Cold tire pressure The tires are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked without direct sunlight on the tires for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km) Tread The part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Bead The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from the wheel rim. Sidewall The part of the tire between the tread and the bead. Weight of optional extras The combined weight of those optional extras that weigh more than the replaced standard parts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These optional extras, such as high-performance brakes, level control, a roof rack or a highperformance battery, are not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories. TIN (Tire Identification Number) This is a unique identifier which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example for a product recall, and thus identify the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. Load bearing index The load bearing index (also load index) is a code that contains the maximum load bearing capacity of a tire. Traction Traction is the result of friction between the tires and the road surface. Tread wear indicators Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Z Wheels and tires Curb weight The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning system and optional equipment if these are installed in the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. 285 286 Changing a wheel Occupant distribution The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions. Total load limit Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle. Changing a wheel Wheels and tires Flat tire The "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 247) contains information and notes on how to deal with a flat tire. Information on driving with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" (Y page 247). Vehicle with emergency spare wheel: in the event of a flat tire, the emergency spare wheel is mounted as described under "Mounting a wheel" (Y page 287). Rotating the wheels G WARNING Interchanging the front and rear wheels may severely impair the driving characteristics if the wheels or tires have different dimensions. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident. Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tires are of the same dimensions. ! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools should not be used near the valve. This could damage the electronic components. Only have tires changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Always observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section (Y page 287). The wear patterns on the front and rear tires differ, depending on the operating conditions. Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tires. Front tires typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in the center. On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, you can rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no warranty book is available, the tires should be rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this may be required earlier. Do not change the direction of wheel rotation. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rotated. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary, restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 271) or the tire pressure monitor (Y page 274). Direction of rotation Tires with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydroplaning. These advantages can only be gained if the tires are installed corresponding to the direction of rotation. An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its correct direction of rotation. Storing wheels Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel. Changing a wheel 287 Preparing the vehicle Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Apply the parking brake. X Bring the front wheels into the straightahead position. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that "normal" level is selected (Y page 151). X Switch off the engine. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or, on vehicles with KEYLESS GO: X Open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. X Remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 128). X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle (Y page 246). X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. X rolling away, for example when changing a wheel. X Fold both plates upwards :. X Fold out lower plate ;. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate =. Securing the vehicle on level ground X On level ground: place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. Securing the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients X On light downhill gradients: place chocks or other suitable items in front of the wheels of the front and rear axle. Raising the vehicle If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it can be found in the tire-change tool kit (Y page 246). The folding wheel chock is an additional safety measure to prevent the vehicle from G WARNING If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury. Z Wheels and tires Mounting a wheel 288 Changing a wheel Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle. ! The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jacking points. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged. Observe the following when raising the vehicle: when the vehicle is raised. sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised. Vehicles with alloy wheels and hub caps: the wheel bolts are covered by a hub cap. Before you can unscrew the wheel bolts, you must remove the hub cap. RMake RTo Wheels and tires raise the vehicle, only use the vehiclespecific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It is not suited for performing maintenance work under the vehicle. RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes. RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the parking brake and inserting wheel chocks. Never disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is raised. RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats. RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its loadbearing capacity due to the restricted height. RMake sure that the distance between the underside of the tires and the ground does not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm). RNever place your hands and feet under the raised vehicle. RDo not lie under the vehicle. RDo not start the engine when the vehicle is raised. RDo not open or close a door or the trunk lid To remove: remove socket ; and lug wrench = (Y page 246). X Position socket ; on hub cap :. X Position lug wrench = on socket ;. X Using lug wrench =, turn hub cap : counter-clockwise and remove it. X To install: before installing, check hub cap : and the wheel area for soiling and clean if necessary. X Put hub cap : in position and turn until it is in the right position. X Position socket ; on hub cap :. X Attach lug wrench = to socket ; and tighten hub cap :. The tightening torque must be 18 lb-ft (25 Nm). X i Note that the hub cap should be tightened to the specified torque of 18 lb-ft (25 Nm). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the hub cap installed at a qualified specialist workshop. Changing a wheel 289 X Using a lug wrench =, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly beneath the jacking point. Turn crank B clockwise until jack A sits completely on jacking point ?. The base of the jack must lie evenly on the ground. X Turn crank B until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground. X Jacking points ! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with ceramicbrake disc: during removal and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore, you should proceed carefully and get a second person assist to you. Alternatively, you can use a second alignment bolt. ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could otherwise be damaged when you screw them in. X Position jack A at jacking point ?. Z Wheels and tires Removing a wheel Changing a wheel 290 Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely. X Screw alignment bolt : into the thread instead of the wheel bolt. X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully. X Remove the wheel. X ! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold the wheel securely against the wheel hub while screwing in the first wheel bolt. Mounting a new wheel G WARNING Wheels and tires Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. G WARNING If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 286). Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel. ! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with ceramicbrake disc: during removal and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore, you should proceed carefully and get a second person assist to you. Alternatively, you can use a second alignment bolt. Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the alignment bolt and push it on. X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight. X Unscrew the alignment bolt. X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is fingertight. X Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel: inflate the collapsible spare wheel (Y page 299). Only then lower the vehicle. X Lowering the vehicle G WARNING The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed. ! Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel: before lowering the vehicle, inflate the collapsible spare wheel with the tire inflation compressor. The wheel rim could otherwise be damaged. Wheel and tire combinations Turn the crank of the jack counter-clockwise until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground. X Place the jack to one side. X 291 These tires have been specially adapted for use with the control systems, such as ABS or ESP®, and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A). The specified tightening torque is 96 lb-ft (130 Nm). X Turn the jack back to its initial position. X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools in the trunk again. X Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted wheel and adjust it if necessary. Observe the recommended tire pressure (Y page 267). X i Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: all wheels mounted must be equipped with functioning sensors. Wheel and tire combinations General notes ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use tires and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. tain AMG tires) Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tire dimension variations could cause the tires to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tires or the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tires, wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved. Information on tires, wheels and approved combinations can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. ! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tires. As a result, MercedesBenz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if you have no information about their previous usage. Overview of abbreviations used in the following tire tables: RBA: both axles RFA: front axle RRA: rear axle Z Wheels and tires RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer- 292 Wheel and tire combinations The recommended pressures for various operating conditions can be found: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard with the recommended tire pressures on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap Observe the notes on recommended tire pressures under various operating conditions (Y page 267). Check tire pressures regularly, and only when the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance recommendations of the tire manufacturer in the vehicle document wallet. Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip the vehicle with: Wheels and tires Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (left and right) Rthe same type of tires at a given time (summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) Exception: it is permissible to install a different type or make in the event of a flat tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 247). Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. i Not all wheel and tire combinations are available at the factory for all countries. i The following pages contain information on approved wheel rims and tire sizes for equipping your vehicle with winter tires. Winter tires are not available at the factory as standard equipment or optional extras. If you want to equip your vehicle with approved winter tires, it may be necessary to obtain wheel rims in the corresponding size. The size of the approved winter tires may differ from the standard tires. This is dependent on the model and the equipment installed at the factory. The tires and wheel rims, as well as further information, can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Wheel and tire combinations 293 Tires CLS 400 Summer tires R 18 Tires Alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL2 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm) FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL2 RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y2, 3 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm) Tires Alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL4 RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL3, 4 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm) Wheels and tires R 19 All-weather tires R 18 Tires Alloy wheels FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S RA: 285/35 R18 97 H M+S3, 4 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm) Winter tires R 18 Tires Alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+S i2 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm) Available as MOExtended tires. Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 4 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tire combinations". 2 3 Z Wheel and tire combinations 294 CLS 400 4MATIC Summer tires R 18 Tires Alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL2 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm) FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL2 RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y2, 3 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm) Wheels and tires R 19 Tires Alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL4 RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL3, 4 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm) All-weather tires R 18 Tires Alloy wheels FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S RA: 285/35 R18 97 H M+S3, 4 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm) Winter tires R 18 Tires Alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+S i2 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm) Available as MOExtended tires. Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 4 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tire combinations". 2 3 Wheel and tire combinations 295 CLS 550 Summer tires R18 Tires Alloy wheels FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL2 RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y2, 3 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm) R19 Tires Alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL3 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm) Tires Alloy wheels FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S RA: 285/35 R18 97 H M+S3 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm) Wheels and tires All-weather tires R18 Winter tires R18 2 3 Tires Alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+S i3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm) Available as MOExtended tires. Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. Z Wheel and tire combinations 296 CLS 550 4MATIC Summer tires R18 Tires Alloy wheels FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL2 RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y2, 3 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm) Wheels and tires R19 Tires Alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL3 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm) All-weather tires R18 Tires Alloy wheels FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S RA: 285/35 R18 97 H M+S3 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm) Winter tires R18 2 3 Tires Alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+S i2 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm) Available as MOExtended tires. Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. Emergency spare wheel 297 Mercedes-AMG CLS 63 S 4MATIC Summer tires R19 Tires Alloy wheels FA: 255/35 ZR19 (96 Y) XL4 RA: 285/30 ZR19 (98 Y) XL3, 4 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm) RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm) Tires Alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+S i4 RA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+S i4 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm) FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+S i4 RA: 285/30 R19 98 V XL M+S i3, 4 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm) RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm) Emergency spare wheel Important safety notes G WARNING The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type of the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. Mounting an emergency spare wheel may severely impair the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Radapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Rnever mount more than one spare wheel or emergency spare wheel that differs in size. 4 3 Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare wheel of a different size briefly. not switch ESP® off. Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions as well as the tire type must be correct. Rdo When using an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size, you must not exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Snow chains must not be mounted on emergency spare wheels. Observe the notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tire combinations". Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. Z Wheels and tires Winter tires R19 298 Emergency spare wheel General notes Wheels and tires You should regularly check the pressure of the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (Y page 267). The value on the wheel is valid. In addition, the emergency spare wheel tire pressure can be found under "Technical data" (Y page 301). An emergency spare wheel may also be mounted against the direction of rotation. Observe the time restriction on use as well as the speed limitation specified on the emergency spare wheel. Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the emergency spare wheel. i When you are driving with the collapsible spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning system or the tire pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss warning system or tire pressure monitor when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: after mounting an emergency spare wheel, the system may still display the tire pressure of the removed wheel for a few minutes. The value displayed for the mounted emergency spare wheel is not the same as the current tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel. "Minispare" emergency spare wheel/ collapsible spare wheel Removing the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel The emergency spare wheel can be found in the stowage well under the trunk floor. X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 226). X Turn stowage well ; counter-clockwise and remove it together with vehicle tool kit tray :. X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare wheel =. Removing the collapsible spare wheel (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) The emergency spare wheel can be found in the stowage well under the trunk floor. X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 226). X Reach into cutout : in the tool holder and lift it up. X Remove collapsible spare wheel ;. Emergency spare wheel 299 Always observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section (Y page 287). Stowing a used collapsible spare wheel Inflating the collapsible spare wheel ! Inflate the collapsible spare wheel using the tire inflation compressor before lowering the vehicle. The wheel rim could otherwise be damaged. ! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tire inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. Mount the collapsible spare wheel as described (Y page 287). The collapsible spare wheel must be mounted before it is inflated. X Pull connector ? and the hose out of the housing. X Remove the cap from the valve on the collapsible spare wheel. X Screw union nut : of the hose onto the valve. X Make sure on/off switch A of the tire inflation compressor is set to 0. X Insert connector ? into a 12 V socket (Y page 227) in your vehicle. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 127). X Press on/off switch A on the tire inflation compressor to I. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. The tire pressure is shown on pressure gauge =. X Inflate the tire to the specified tire pressure. The specified tire pressure is printed on the yellow label of the emergency spare wheel. X When the specified tire pressure has been reached, press on/off switch A on the electric air pump to 0. The tire inflation compressor is switched off. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock. X Z Wheels and tires ! Only place the collapsible spare wheel in the vehicle when it is dry. Otherwise, moisture may get into the vehicle. Take the following steps to stow a used collapsible spare wheel. Otherwise, it will not fit into the spare wheel well. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have this work performed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve. X Use the back of the valve cap to unscrew the valve insert from the valve and release the air. i Fully deflating the tires can take a few minutes. X Screw the valve insert back into the valve. X Screw the valve cap back on. X Remove the protective sheet from the vehicle tool kit and pull it over the collapsible spare wheel. X Stow the collapsible spare wheel in the emergency spare wheel well under the trunk. Emergency spare wheel 300 If the tire pressure is higher than the specified pressure, press pressure release valve button ; until the correct tire pressure has been reached. X Unscrew air hose union nut : from the valve. X Screw the cap onto the valve of the collapsible spare wheel again. X Stow connector ? and the hose in the lower section of the tire inflation compressor. X Stow the tire inflation compressor in the vehicle. Wheels and tires X Emergency spare wheel 301 Technical data All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) "Minispare" emergency spare wheel Tires Alloy wheels T 155/60 R18 107 M Tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) 4.5 B x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm) Mercedes-AMG vehicles Tires Alloy wheels 175/50 – 19 97 P Tire pressure: 350 kPa (3.5 bar/51 psi) 6.5 B x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 0.55 in (14 mm) Wheels and tires Collapsible spare wheel Z 302 303 Useful information ............................ 304 Information regarding technical data .................................................... 304 Vehicle electronics ........................... 304 Identification plates ......................... 306 Service products and filling capacities ..................................................... 307 Technical data Vehicle data ....................................... 312 304 Vehicle electronics Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 29). Information regarding technical data Technical data i The data stated here specifically refers to a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the data for all vehicle variants and trim levels. Vehicle electronics Retrofitting two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) G WARNING The electromagnetic radiation from modified or incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters can interfere with the vehicle electronics. This can compromise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING The electromagnetic radiation from incorrectly operated RF transmitters can interfere with the vehicle electronics, for example: Rif the RF transmitter is not connected with an exterior antenna Rthe exterior antenna has been installed incorrectly or is not a low-reflection type This can compromise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Have the low-reflection exterior antenna mounted at a qualified specialist workshop. When operating RF transmitters in the vehicle, always connect them with the low-reflection exterior antenna. ! The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of RF transmitters are not observed. In particular, the following conditions must be complied with: Ronly approved wavebands may be used. with the maximum permissible output in these wavebands is required. Ronly approved antenna positions may be used. Rcompliance Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and the health of others. Using an exterior antenna takes into account current scientific discussions relating to the possible health hazards that may result from electromagnetic fields. The following antenna positions may be used if RF transmitters have been properly installed: Vehicle electronics 305 CLS Coupe: approved antenna positions : Front roof area ; Rear roof area = Rear fender ? Trunk lid i When installing an antenna on the front roof area of vehicles with a sliding sunroof, observe the sweeping range of the roof. On the rear fenders, it is recommended to position the antenna on the side of the vehicle closest to the center of the road. Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 when retrofitting RF transmitters (Road Vehicles - EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment). Observe the legal requirements for retrofittings. If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply or antenna connections intended for use with the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's additional instructions when installing. Deviations with respect to wavebands, maximum transmission outputs or antenna positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz. Waveband Maximum transmission output Short wave 3 - 54 MHz 100 W 4 m waveband 74 - 88 MHz 30 W 2 m waveband 144 - 174 MHz 50 W Trunked radio/Tetra 380 - 460 MHz 10 W 70 cm waveband 400 - 460 MHz 35 W Mobile communications (2G/3G/4G) 10 W The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: RRF transmitters with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW RRF transmitters with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (trunked radio/Tetra) RMobile telephones (2G/3G/4G) There is no restriction for antenna positions on the outside of the vehicle for the following wavebands: RTrunked radio/Tetra cm waveband R2G/3G/4G R70 Z Technical data The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the following values: Identification plates 306 Identification plates Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) i The data shown on the vehicle identification plate is used only as an example. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle identification plate. Vehicle identification number (VIN) X Open the front left-hand door. You will see vehicle identification plate :. Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost position. X Fold floor covering : upwards. You will see VIN ;. Technical data X Engine number Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only) ; VIN = Vehicle model : Emission control information plate, Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only) ; VIN = Paint code including the certification of both federal and Californian emissions standards ; Engine number (stamped into the crankcase) = VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) Service products and filling capacities Important safety notes G WARNING Service products may be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Comply with instructions on the use, storage and disposal of service products on the labels of the respective original containers. Always store service products sealed in their original containers. Always keep service products out of the reach of children. H Environmental note Dispose of service products in an environmentally responsible manner. Service products include the following: RFuels RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) RCoolant RBrake fluid RWindshield washer fluid RClimate control system refrigerant Components and service products must be matched. Only use products recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Damage which is caused by the use of products which have not been recommended is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. They are listed in this Mercedes-Benz Operator's Manual in the appropriate section. Information on tested and approved products can be obtained at an authorized MercedesBenz Center or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. You can recognize service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on the containers: RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Other identifications, for example: R0 W-30 W-30 R5 W-40 R5 Fuel Important safety notes G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling. G WARNING Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel. RMB-Approval Z Technical data Service products and filling capacities 307 308 Service products and filling capacities Tank capacity RM100 Missing values were not available at time of going to print. Model Total capacity Mercedes AMG vehicles All other models Model 21.1 US gal (80.0 l) Of which reserve Mercedes AMG vehicles All other models Approx. 2.4 US gal (9.0 l) Technical data Gasoline Fuel grade ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. ! Only refuel using unleaded premium grade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/ 95 RON. ! Only use the fuel recommended. Operating the vehicle with other fuels can lead to engine failure. ! Do not use the following: RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol) RE100 (100% ethanol) RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol) RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol) RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol) (100% methanol) with metalliferous additives RGasoline RDiesel Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recommended for your vehicle. Do not use additives. Otherwise, engine damage may occur. This does not include cleaning additives for the removal and prevention of residue build-up. Gasoline may only be mixed with cleaning additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz; see "Additives". You can obtain further information from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ! To ensure the longevity and full performance of the engine, only premium-grade unleaded gasoline must be used. If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailable and you have to refuel with unleaded gasoline of a lower grade, observe the following precautions: ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with premium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as possible. RDo not drive at the maximum speed. RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine speeds over 3,000 rpm. You will usually find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the pump, ask the staff for assistance. i For further information, consult a qualified specialist workshop or visit http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol. Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel. As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden accel- Service products and filling capacities Additives ! Operating the engine with fuel additives added later can lead to engine failure. Do not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue buildup. gasoline must only be mixed with additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions for use on the product label. More information about recommended additives can be obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use branded fuels that have additives. The quality of the fuel available in some countries may not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the injection system as a result. In such cases, and in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gasoline may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container. Engine oil General notes ! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a specification other than is necessary to fulfill the prescribed service intervals. Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer replacement intervals than those prescribed. You could otherwise cause engine damage or damage to the exhaust gas aftertreatment. Follow the instructions in the service interval display regarding the oil change. Otherwise, you may damage the engine and the exhaust gas aftertreatment. When handling engine oil, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 307). The engine oils are matched to the performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals. You should therefore only use engine oils and oil filters that are approved for vehicles with maintenance systems. For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or visit the website http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle. Model All models MB-Freigabe or MBApproval 229.5 Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils for Mercedes AMG vehicles. i MB approval is indicated on the oil containers. Filling capacities The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter. Model Capacity Mercedes AMG vehicles 9.0 US qt (8.5 l) CLS 400 CLS 400 4MATIC 6.9 US qt (6.5 l) CLS 550 CLS 550 4MATIC 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) Brake fluid G WARNING The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake Z Technical data eration. Never refuel using fuel with a lower AKI. Information on refueling (Y page 135). 309 310 Service products and filling capacities fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This would impair braking efficiency. There is a risk of an accident. You should have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals. Comply with the important safety notes for service products when handling brake fluid (Y page 307). The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. Only use brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MBApproval 331.0. Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Technical data i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet. Coolant Important safety notes G WARNING If antifreeze comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Let the engine cool down before you add antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from components before starting the engine. ! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or contact a qualified specialist workshop. ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating. i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet. Comply with the important safety precautions for service products when handling coolant (Y page 307). The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following tasks: Rcorrosion protection protection Rraising the boiling point If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolant during operation is approximately 266 ‡ (130 †). The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should: Rantifreeze Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †). Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not be dissipated as effectively. Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/ corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance with MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1. i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and corrosion protection. Service products and filling capacities Filling capacities Model Capacity CLS 400 CLS 400 4MATIC Approx. 10.9 US qt (10.3 l) CLS 550 CLS 550 4MATIC Approx. 11.5 US qt (10.9 l) Mercedes AMG vehicles Approx. 11.4 US qt (10.8 l) Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system Important safety notes G WARNING Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. ! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps. ! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the level sensor may be damaged. ! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit washer fluid should be mixed together. The spray nozzles may otherwise become blocked. Comply with the important safety notes for service products when handling washer fluid (Y page 307). At temperatures above freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit. Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. At temperatures below freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit. For the correct mixing ratio refer to the information on the antifreeze reservoir. i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round. Climate control system refrigerant Important safety notes The climate control system of your vehicle is filled with refrigerant R 134a. The instruction label regarding the refrigerant type used can be found on the radiator cross member. ! Only the refrigerant R 134a and the PAG oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used. The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with any other PAG oil that is not approved for R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climate control system may be damaged. Service work, such as topping up refrigerant or replacing components, may only be carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations must be adhered to, SAE standard J639 included. Always have work on the climate control system carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Z Technical data i The coolant is checked with every maintenance interval at a qualified specialist workshop. 311 312 Vehicle data Refrigerant instruction label Vehicle data General notes Please note that for the specified vehicle data: Rthe Example: refrigerant instruction label : Warning symbol ; Refrigerant filling capacity = Applicable standards ? PAG oil part number A Type of refrigerant heights specified may vary as a result of: - tires - load - condition of the suspension - optional equipment Roptional equipment reduces the maximum payload. Dimensions and weights (CLS Coupe) Warning symbol : advises you about: Rpossible dangers service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop Technical data Rhaving Filling capacities Mercedes AMG vehicles Refrigerant PAG oil All other models Refrigerant PAG oil Capacity 22.6 ± 0.4 oz (640 ± 10 g) 4.2 oz (120 g) Capacity 20.8 ± 0.4 oz (590 ± 10 g) 4.2 oz (120 g) Model : Opening height Mercedes AMG vehicles 71.1 in (1805 mm) CLS 400 CLS 400 4MATIC 70.7 in (1796 mm) CLS 550 CLS 550 4MATIC 70.3 in (1786 mm) Mercedes AMG vehicles Vehicle length 195.6 in (4967 mm) Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 81.7 in (2075 mm) Vehicle data Mercedes AMG vehicles Vehicle height 56.3 in (1431 mm) Wheelbase 113.1 in (2874 mm) Turning radius 36.9 ft (11.25 m) Maximum roof load 220 lb (100 kg) Maximum trunk load 220 lb (100 kg) Model (except Mercedes AMG vehicles) 313 Turning radius CLS 400 36.7 ft (11.18 m) CLS 400 4MATIC 37.8 ft (11.51 m) CLS 550 36.8 ft (11.21 m) CLS 550 4MATIC 37.8 ft (11.53 m) Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 81.7 in (2075 mm) Wheelbase 113.1 in (2874 mm) Maximum roof load 220 lb (100 kg) Maximum trunk load 220 lb (100 kg) Model (except Mercedes AMG vehicles) Vehicle length CLS 400 CLS 400 4MATIC 194.4 in (4937 mm) CLS 550 CLS 550 4MATIC 195.0 in (4952 mm) Model (except Mercedes AMG vehicles) Technical data All models (except Mercedes AMG vehicles) Vehicle height CLS 400 CLS 400 4MATIC 56.1 in (1424 mm) CLS 550 CLS 550 4MATIC 55.8 in (1418 mm) Z 314 315 316